Thank you for purchasing this Factory Service

Manual CD/DVD from servicemanuals4u.com.

Please check out our eBay auctions for more great

deals on Factory Service Manuals:

servicemanuals4u
i
 Note

Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under “Notices”
on page 291.

First Edition (September 1995)

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such provisions are
inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE LIMITED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow
disclaimer or express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time.

It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information about, IBM products (machines and
programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not
be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products, programming, or services in your country.

Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM Authorized Dealer or your IBM
Marketing Representative.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The furnishing of this
document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM
Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood, NY 10594, U.S.A.

Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1995. All rights reserved. Note to US Government
Users – Documentation related to restricted rights – Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in
GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
 Thank You for Selecting
an IBM ThinkPad 760C Computer

The IBM ThinkPad 760C

is one of the leading notebook-size computers available today.
With its fast response, long battery hours,
brilliant display, and
high-technology features, we guarantee that it will
serve your
mobile computing needs.

iii
 The following are the distinctive system features of the IBM ThinkPad
760C computer.

1 Mwave DSP Audio, Telephony, and

Data/Fax Modem Features
11 Long-Life Battery Pack
2 Infrared Communication
10 PCMCIA Support
Support
9 TrackPoint III
3 ThinkPad Features
8 Easy-Setup Program
Thinkpad Features
Config

Restart

7 TFT Color LCD Screen 4 Power Management

6 Fn Key Function
5 Security Features

iv IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 1 Mwave DSP Audio, Telephony, and Data/Fax Modem Features: Page 71.
16-bit high-quality audio, telephone, and fax machine functions are provided with a built-in speaker and microphone
to complete the multimedia computing solution.
2 Infrared Communication: Page 68.
Two infrared ports for wireless serial communication are supplied with your computer.
3 ThinkPad Features Program: Page 38.
The ThinkPad Features program allows you to set various parameters by using a graphical user interface or
commands.
4 Power Management: Page 99.
Power Management sets the computer to different modes to save battery power when you are not using the
computer. It also provides a resume function, which quickly returns you to where you left off.
5 Security Features: Page 109.
The computer provides security passwords for the computer and hard disk drive. Lock security also is provided for
internal devices. The Personalization Utilities can help identify your computer.
6 Fn Key Function: Page 51.
The combination of this Fn key with a function key is used to control display modes, speaker volume, or battery
power-saving modes.
7 TFT Color LCD: Page 170.
A large and brilliant thin-film transistor (TFT) color LCD supports various colors in many resolutions.
8 Easy-Setup: Page 44.
The built-in system programs in Easy-Setup allow the basic setup of your computer.
9 TrackPoint III: Page 26.
Pointing, selecting, and dragging all become part of a single process without lifting your hands from the TrackPoint
III keyboard.
1 PCMCIA Support: Page 53.
The computer provides two Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) slots. PCMCIA
software is also provided so that you can use PC Cards more easily and conveniently.
11 Long-Life Battery Pack: Page 83.
The operating time of the computer is extended with the long-life battery pack.

v
About This Book
This User's Guide contains information that will help you operate the
IBM ThinkPad 760C computer (hereafter called 760C or computer).

Chapter 1, “Getting Started” provides information about the

Product Map and the procedure to set up your computer.
Chapter 2, “Getting Familiar with Your Computer” acquaints you
with the features of your computer.
Chapter 3, “Operating Your Computer” provides information on
using your computer with its different features.
Chapter 4, “Using Battery Power” provides battery information and
describes how to operate your computer with the battery pack.
Chapter 5, “Protecting Your Computer” provides information for
protecting your computer and internal devices against unauthorized
use.
Chapter 6, “Installing and Removing Options” describes how to
install or remove IBM options.
Chapter 7, “Installing Software” provides procedures for installing
operating systems and device drivers in your computer.
Chapter 8, “Solving Computer Problems” describes what to do
when you have a computer problem.
Appendix A, “Avoiding Hardware Conflicts” lists some steps you
can take to avoid problems when you add or remove options.
Appendix B, “Advanced Information for PC Cards” provides
additional information when using PC Cards.
Appendix C, “Additional Information for Mwave DSP Features”
provides additional information when using the Mwave functions.
Appendix D, “Using PS2 Commands” provides the PS2
commands for the ThinkPad Features program.
Appendix E, “Features and Specifications” describes the features
and specifications associated with your computer.
Appendix F, “Product Warranties and Notices” contains the
warranty statements of your computer and notices for this book.

vi IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

Information Notices
This User's Guide contains notices that relate to specific information
or text.

Caution
Note Indicates situations that are
Usild Lke Sejk
potentially hazardous to you.
Provides important hints, tips, Okejf Uenfls Lkdjf It appears in text before the
guidance, or advice. Note:
LKjef osijdf lke.
Ltke fsoie ltij erlkjs efoitj sdf. The skfeoig
lksjdf otie sfldkj tekjs fdi zdif lkt elskfd. instruction or situation that
Pdfk setk sdfk shtke fdij thesdfkl sekj soit
LIej tlkje sfoi efp sl
lkjdf toie sfekjt. oit skdf 3 lskdti shd gkejt wse. Tkj eoisdjf
tlkjsd.
Caution:
could be hazardous.
Warning: Ljsdkf thkejr fosidj tlkje afshei ldfkue.
LKj tlke fsoiej glkje f Toisdjf sldj ohd flskajt shdf, foiasj.
lskjdf oiret e. SKjt
slkfj eoit sf.
Danger:

Lskjdt oidsfa thie rsldkj etskdjf xo.

Oijds kj dtah fia glisdjf klasdjt sadf.

Warning 1 LKdkfsa oif lkaj oisdt lskef.

Danger
Indicates possible damage to
programs, devices, system, or Indicates situations that are
data. It appears next to the Chapter 2. YoekfBlksd Lekjf 109
potentially lethal or extremely
related instruction or situation hazardous to you. It is indicated
in which possible damage could
occur. by the symbol and appears
in text before the instruction or
situation that could be dangerous.

Treatment of Icons
This User's Guide contains the following icons (symbols)
representing procedures or information unique to the operating
system installed in your computer, and to referenced information.

Information for IBM Information for IBM DOS

O S / 2
Operating System/2 DOS users.
(OS/2) users.
Where to go for referenced
Information for Microsoft**
information.
WIN Windows** users.

vii
Electrical Safety Notice
DANGER:
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication
cables is hazardous. Toavoid shock hazard, connect and
disconnect cables as shown below when installing, moving or
opening the covers of this product or attached devices. The
power cord must be used with a properly grounded outlet.
ToConnect ToDisconnect
Turneverything OFF. Turneverything OFF.

First, attach all cables to devices. First, remove power cord from the
outlet.

Remove signal cables from

receptacles.

Attach signal cables to

receptacles.

Remove all cables from devices.

Attach power cord to an outlet.

Turn device ON.

Note: In the U.K., by law,the Note: In the U.K., by law,the power

telephone line cable must be cord must be disconnected after the
connected after the power cord. telephone line cable.

viii IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 DANGER

Do not disassemble, incinerate, or short-circuit the

rechargeable battery pack. Do not put it in trash that is
disposed of in landfills. Dispose of it as required by
local ordinances or regulations.

CAUTION:
The lithium battery (IBM P/N 29H8924, UL-recognized
component—File No. MH12210), can only be replaced by your
dealer or an IBM service representative. It contains lithium and
can explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of. Do
not: (1) throw or immerse into water, (2) heat to more than
100°C (212°F), or (3) repair, or disassemble. Dispose of it as
required by local ordinances or regulations.

CAUTION:
The nickel metal hydride rechargeable battery can only be
replaced by your dealer or an IBM service representative. Do
not disassemble, incinerate, or short-circuit it. The battery can
cause burns or release toxic chemicals. Do not put it in trash
that is disposed of in landfills. Dispose of it as required by
local ordinances and regulations.

CAUTION:
The fluorescent lamp in the liquid crystal display (LCD) contains
mercury. Do not put it in trash that is disposed of in landfills.
Dispose of it as required by local ordinances or regulations.

The LCD is made of glass, and rough handling or dropping the

computer can cause the LCD to break. If the LCD breaks and
the internal fluid gets into your eyes or on your hands,
immediately wash the affected areas with water for at least 15
minutes; then get medical care if any symptoms are present
after washing.

ix
x IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide
 Contents

About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi

Information Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Treatment of Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Electrical Safety Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

Chapter 1. Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Overall Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
About the Product Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Checking Your Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Other Symbols on the Product Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Setting Up Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer . . . . . . 15

Identifying the Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
System-Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
LCD Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Providing Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
AC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Car Battery Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Operating with the TrackPoint III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Changing the Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Operating the Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Using the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using a DOS Application with Your Computer . . . . . . . . 31
Viewing the Online Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Starting in OS/2 or Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Starting in DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Keeping the Computer from Being Damaged . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Carrying the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

What Happens When Power Is Turned On? . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Using the ThinkPad Features Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Starting the ThinkPad Features Program . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using Easy-Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Starting Easy-Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using the Selectable Drive-Startup Sequence . . . . . . . . . 49
Using the Fn Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 xi

 Using PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
PC Card Limitations under Suspend Mode . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using the PC Card Director Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Starting PC Card Director for OS/2 or Windows . . . . . . . 55
Starting PC Card Director for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Using the Infrared Communication Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Considerations for Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using the Mwave DSP Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Using the Audio Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Using the Telephony Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Charging the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Charging with the AC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Charging with the Quick Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Replacing the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Monitoring the Battery Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using the Battery Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using the Fuel-Gauge Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Preserving Battery-Pack Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Maximizing Battery-Powered Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Using Advanced Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Decreasing LCD Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Using the Battery Power-Management Function . . . . . . . 99

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Using Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Power-On Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Hard Disk Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Supervisor Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Using the Personalization Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Entering the Personal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Deleting a Personalized Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Using Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Using the Security Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Using the PC Card Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options . . . . . . . . . 137

Installing and Removing PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Inserting the PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

xii IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Removing the PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Increasing Memory Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Installing and Removing the DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Replacing the Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay . . . . . . . 152
Installing a Secondary Hard Disk Drive in the UltraBay . . . . . 156
Installing an Option in the UltraBay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Installing the DAA/Telephony Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Attaching an External Numeric Keypad or a Mouse . . . . . . . 167
Using the Mouse and Other Pointing Devices . . . . . . . . . 168
Attaching an External Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Attaching an External Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Changing the Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Setting the Monitor Type and the Display Driver . . . . . . . 172
Connecting an External Display to the Computer . . . . . . . 173
Changing the Screen Resolution or Color Depth . . . . . . . 173
Attaching an IBM Dock I or Dock II Expansion Unit . . . . . . . 175

Chapter 7. Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

What You Need for Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Installing the Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Installing Software for OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Installing IBM OS/2 Warp Version 3 or Later . . . . . . . . . 181
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for OS/2 . . . . . 184
Installing the PCMCIA Device Driver for OS/2 . . . . . . . . 185
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for OS/2 . . . . 186
Installing the Infrared Device Driver for OS/2 . . . . . . . . . 188
Installing the ThinkPad Display Device Driver for OS/2 . . . 190
Installing Software for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Installing IBM PC DOS Version 7.0 or Later . . . . . . . . . . 191
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for DOS . . . . . 192
Installing the PCMCIA Device Driver for DOS . . . . . . . . . 193
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for DOS . . . . 195
Installing Software for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Installing Microsoft Windows Version 3.11 or Later . . . . . . 198
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for Windows . . . 202
Installing the PCMCIA Features for Windows . . . . . . . . . 203
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows . . 205
Installing the Infrared Device Driver for Windows . . . . . . . 207
Installing the ThinkPad Display Driver for Windows . . . . . 208

Contents xiii
 Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Commonly Asked Questions and Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Common Problems and Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Frequently Asked Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Testing the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Troubleshooting Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
LCD Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Screen Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Other General Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
What If Testing Cannot Find the Problem? . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Battery Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Diskette Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
External Display Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Hibernation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Infrared Communication Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Keyboard, External Numeric Keypad, and Pointing Device
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Mwave DSP Feature Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Option Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
PC Card Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Software Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Getting Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Listing Installed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Recording Identification Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
The IBM HelpClub: Another Great Choice (in the U.S.A.) . . 238
The IBM HelpClub: Another Great Choice (for European
Countries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Appendix A. Avoiding Hardware Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . 243

List of System Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Avoiding System Resource Conflicts When Using PC Cards . . 246
Doing a Network Remote Program Load . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Starting the Computer from an ATA PC Card . . . . . . . . . 247

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards . . . . . . 249

Auto Configurator for PC Card Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Starting the Auto Configurator Utility for OS/2 or Windows . 249
Starting the Auto Configurator Utility for DOS . . . . . . . . . 253

xiv IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

Adding to the CONFIG.SYS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Registered Drivers and Standard Rules for OS/2 . . . . . . . 254
Registered Drivers and Standard Rules for DOS and
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Storage Card Device Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
PCMCIA Storage Card Device Driver for OS/2 . . . . . . . . 258
PCMCIA Storage Card Device Driver for DOS and Windows 258
Before Using PCMCIA Storage Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Using PCMCIA ATA Cards with Multiple Partitions . . . . . . 259
Parameters for the OS/2 PCMCIA ATA Card Device Driver . 259
Parameters for DOS PCMCIA Storage Card Device Drivers 260
PCMCIA Storage Card Device Manager for OS/2 . . . . . . 262
OS/2 PCMCIA Storage API Device Driver . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Flash Card Memory Technology Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Checking the Allocated Resources for the PC Card . . . . . . . 263
Avoiding PC Card Resource Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Appendix C. Additional Information for Mwave DSP

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Audio Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Mwave MIDI Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Telephony Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Appendix D. Using PS2 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Appendix E. Features and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
IBM Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Diskette Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Appendix F. Product Warranties and Notices . . . . . . . . 287

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Electronic Emission Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Telecommunication Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Contents xv
 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

xvi IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Chapter 1. Getting Started

Welcome to the world of ThinkPad computers!

The ThinkPad 760C computer is designed to meet your mobile

computing needs. It provides you with various features, unique to
IBM products, which help your everyday work go easy and smoothly.
You can use your ThinkPad 760C computer in the office or at home
as a desktop computer by attaching an external keyboard, display, or
other external devices. And, of course, your computer can be easily
carried wherever you need a computer “on the go.”

This chapter describes the Product Map and gives step-by-step

instructions to help you set up your new computer.

Overall Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

About the Product Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Checking Your Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Other Symbols on the Product Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Setting Up Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 1

Getting Started

Overall Setup Procedures

When using the computer for the first time:
Set Up the Computer

1 First, open the Product Map and check whether you have
all the necessary items with your computer.
See page 4.
Then, install the battery pack in the computer. Now you
1
are ready to turn on the computer.
2

See page 7.

Install Options

2 If you have any options, such as memory cards, install the

options.
See page 137.

3
Customize Your Computer

Easy-Setup You can use Easy-Setup, a built-in system function, to set

passwords to prevent your computer from unauthorized
1 2 3 use, or use the ThinkPad Features program to customize
Config Date/Time Password Start Up Test
the performance of your computer.
Restart For Easy-Setup, see page 44.
For the ThinkPad Features program, see page 38.

ThinkPad Features

2 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Getting Started

Make a Backup of Your System

4 Your computer comes with the necessary software already

installed for you to use the computer right out of the box.
However, on some computers, the Diskette Factory
program is installed so you can create backup diskettes.
On other computers, you will find utility and device driver
diskettes packed in the box with the computer.
If your computer did not come with the utility and device
driver diskettes, make a backup copy of all necessary files
using the Diskette Factory. This way, if you ever need to
reinstall the operating system, you will have all the
necessary software you need to restore your computer to
the way it was at the time of purchase.

Do you need more hard disk space?

If your computer did not come with the utility and device driver diskettes, and you have already made a backup
copy of all necessary software using the Diskette Factory, you can delete any preinstalled software you do not
want to use to have more free hard disk space.
Click on the Diskette Factory icon; then follow the instructions on the screen.
You can also delete the demonstration program.

You are ready to use your computer. If you are reinstalling the operating system...
If you have any application programs to install, follow If you are reinstalling the operating system to
the instructions in the documentation that came with customize your computer, follow the instructions on
those programs. page 177.

If you have any problems after you have customized your computer, refer to “Commonly Asked
Questions and Problems” on page 211 to solve your problem.

Chapter 1. Getting Started 3

Getting Started

About the Product Map

The Product Map is the fold-out diagram that you first see when you
unpack the computer. When you physically place the computer on
the Map, you will see an overview of the computer system.

Checking Your Items

Start checking the shipped items by using the Product Map.

1 Remove the Product Map from the box and spread it on

a desk or flat surface.

2 Remove the items from the box, one by one, and match
them with the corresponding numbers in the figure on
page 5.
Make sure that no items are missing. If any item is missing or
damaged, contact your place of purchase.

4 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Getting Started

1 2

6 5 3
7
4

4
1 7
The Battery Pack supplies power to
The Power Cord connects the AC The Miscellaneous Items Envelope
the computer for mobile operation.
Adapter to the electrical outlet. Some contains:
AC Adapters are not shipped with a 5 †
Telephone cable
power cord. The Utility Diskette contains the
Spare caps for TrackPoint III
various system programs.
2 Spacer
The AC Adapter plugs into an electrical 6 † PC (PCMCIA) card lock
outlet and supplies power to the The Driver Diskettes contain the Other items
computer. device drivers.

3
The User's Guide is this book. It
provides the installing and operating
information you need for your computer.

† In some countries, backup diskettes should be created using the Diskette Factory program when the computer
power is turned on for the first time. Follow the instructions for “Building System Diskettes” in the Preload Guide
supplied with the computer.

Chapter 1. Getting Started 5

Getting Started

Other Symbols on the Product Map

This section describes the slots, connectors, and options that are shown on the Product Map. To install
options, refer to Chapter 6, “Installing and Removing Options” on page 137.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

15

14

13
10

11

12

1 7
The Serial Connector connects a 9-pin, 4 / 12 An External Keyboard connects to the
serial-device cable. The Infrared Port is where data external input-device connector through
between computers or systems is the keyboard/mouse connector.
2 transferred using infrared (IR)
technology, without connecting cables. 8
The Parallel Connector usually
An External Numeric Keypad connects
connects a parallel-printer signal cable. 5
to the external input-device connector.
3 The System Expansion Connector
The External-Display Connector connects the expansion unit or port 9
connects the signal cable of a video replicator. The PCMCIA Slots accept one or two
graphics adapter (VGA), super video Personal Computer Memory Card
6
graphics adapter (SVGA), or compatible International Association (PCMCIA)
An external Mouse connects directly
display. cards (hereafter called PC Cards).
to the external input-device connector
or is used with the external numeric
keypad.

6 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Getting Started

1 13 15
The Security Keyhole attaches a The Modem/Fax Port connects a The Headphone Jack is a 1/8-inch
Kensington** MicroSaver** Security modem or fax cable. (Available as an (3.5-mm) diameter jack that connects a
System lock (hereafter called a option in some countries.) stereo headphone or external speakers.
Kensington lock) or compatible locks to 14 Warning: To avoid possible loss of
secure your computer. The Microphone/Line-In Jack is a hearing, do not wear the headphones
1/8-inch (3.5-mm) diameter jack that while you turn on the computer or
11
connects a stereo microphone or connect the headphones to this jack.
The Memory Slot accepts a dual inline
memory module (DIMM) adapter with external audio device. A dynamic
one or two DIMM memory options. microphone or condenser microphone,
12 operated by an external power source,
Infrared Port. See 4 . or an equivalent audio device can be
used. The built-in microphone is
disabled when you use this jack.

Setting Up Your Computer

You are now ready to assemble and start your computer. The steps on the next few pages will guide
you through the process. The following conventions are used in the steps and illustrations that appear
in the Getting Started section.
1 Indicates the main sequence of actions. This number in a step corresponds to the same number in
a figure.
1 Indicates subsequent actions that follow a main action. An arrow accompanying a circled number
shows the direction of movement.

Chapter 1. Getting Started 7

Getting Started

1 Right-Side View

2
1

3 Right-Side View

2
1

8 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Getting Started

To install the battery pack:

1 Slide the latches on both sides of the computer toward the front, and open the liquid
crystal display (LCD).
(Do 1 and 2 .)
When the LCD opens, the keyboard is slanted slightly at an easy typing angle.

2 Slide the keyboard raiser 1 on both sides of the keyboard toward you, and push the
keyboard down so it lies flat on the computer.
(Do 1 and 2 .)
Warning:
Always push the keyboard down flat on the computer whenever you open the keyboard.

3 Push the same latches used in step 1 on both sides of the computer further away from
you; then raise the keyboard.
(Do 1 and 2 .)
Some pressure might be needed to slide these latches if they are tight.
You can use the tabs 2 on the front of the keyboard to easily open the keyboard.

Chapter 1. Getting Started 9

Getting Started

4
2

10 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Getting Started

DANGER

The battery pack provided with your computer contains a small amount of harmful
substances. To avoid possible injury:
Keep the battery pack away from fire.
Do not soak the battery pack in water or expose it to rain.
Do not attempt to disassemble the battery pack.
Avoid mechanical shocks to the battery.
Always use battery packs recommended by IBM.
Keep the battery pack away from children.
When disposing of the battery, comply with local regulations or your company's
safety standards.

4 Install the battery pack with the blue-strap side up into the middle (empty) bay, and press
it firmly into the connector.
(Do 1 , 2 , and 3 )

5 Close the keyboard.

Make sure it clicks into place.

Chapter 1. Getting Started 11

Getting Started

1
7
3

12 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Getting Started

You can raise the keyboard to an angle for easy typing by sliding the keyboard raiser (used in step
2 on page 9) away from you.

6 Position the LCD so that it is convenient for viewing; then slide the speaker volume
control to the middle position and position the brightness control ( ) as shown.

7 Connect the AC Adapter as shown.

(Do 1 , 2 , and 3 .)

8 Push and release the power switch to turn on the computer.

The power switch automatically returns to its original position after you push and release it.

9 After a single beep, one of the following screens appears, confirming that the system is
operating correctly.

1995 .12.31
Year Month Day

23:59:59
Hour Month Second

Startup screen
Date and Time menu
This screen instructs you to set the initial date and If you purchased a computer with a preinstalled
time. To set the date and time, see “Using operating system, the startup screen for the operating
Easy-Setup” on page 44. system appears. (The screen shown is an example of
an operating system screen.)
A demonstration program might run automatically.

If any other screen appears, a failure might have occurred in the computer. See Chapter 8, “Solving
Computer Problems” on page 209.

Congratulations! You have successfully completed the basic setup of your computer.

Chapter 1. Getting Started 13

Getting Started

You can now start using your computer or continue reading Chapter 2, “Getting Familiar with Your
Computer” on page 15 for more information about your computer.

Important

It is recommended that you make a backup

copy of the files on the hard disk drive, in case
you accidentally erase preinstalled software or
intentionally modify the hard disk drive. You can
use the backup copy to restore your computer
to the way it was at the time of purchase.
In some countries, you can create the device
driver diskettes you need to install all necessary
software, using the Diskette Factory program.
Follow the instructions for “Building System
Diskettes” in the Preload Guide supplied with
your computer.

14 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer

This chapter provides basic information about your computer.

Identifying the Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

System-Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
LCD Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Providing Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
AC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Car Battery Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Operating with the TrackPoint III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Changing the Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Operating the Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Using the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using a DOS Application with Your Computer . . . . . . . . 31
Viewing the Online Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Starting in OS/2 or Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Starting in DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Keeping the Computer from Being Damaged . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Carrying the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 15

Identifying the Hardware Features

Identifying the Hardware Features

In this section, you can review the hardware features of your
computer.
Top View

Front View
19 1

2
18

4
3

17
4

10 5

12
6

16 7
15 8
14 9
13 10
12 11

16 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Identifying the Hardware Features

Top View

1 The top cover holds the 2 The indicator lamps consist

computer display also. of the power-on, suspend,
and battery-status lamps.
(See page 20.)

Front View

1 The color LCD screen, which 6 The external-input-device 13 The palm rest is where you
uses thin-film transistor (TFT) connector is used to attach a rest the palms of your hands
technology, displays the mouse, external keyboard, or when using the keyboard.
computer output and can be external numeric keypad to the
14 The TrackPoint III is a built-in
moved to any desired viewing computer.
pointing device that provides a
angle. SVGA (800-by-600 (See pages 167–169.)
function similar to that of a
resolution) video mode is
7 The PCMCIA slots accept one mouse. It consists of a
supported with 65 536 colors
or two PC Cards. pointing stick and two click
on the LCD. (See page 30.)
(See page 138.) buttons. (See page 26.)
A maximum of 1024-by-768
8 The PC Card eject buttons 15 The diskette-eject button
resolution video can be
eject the PC Card from the ejects a diskette from the
produced with 256 colors on
PCMCIA slot. diskette drive.
any attached external display
(See page 141.)
that supports this resolution 16 The removable diskette drive
mode. (See page 170.) 9 The security keyhole is used installed in the UltraBay reads
with a Kensington lock or a data from or writes data to a
2 The built-in microphone
compatible lock to protect your diskette. One 3.5-inch,
captures sound and voice
computer. (See page 131.) 1.44MB or 2.88MB diskette
when it is used with an
drive can be installed.
application program capable of 1 The release latches release
handling an audio or telephony the LCD or keyboard. Sliding 17 The Fn key is used with the
function. (See page 71.) them toward the front opens function keys to activate the Fn
the LCD, and sliding them key functions. (See page 51.)
3 The brightness control moves
towards the back opens the
up or down to adjust the 18 The LCD indicator panel
keyboard.
brightness of the display. shows the current status of the
11 The front infrared port allows computer and battery power
4 The keyboard raisers are
the computer to communicate with symbols and numeric
used to lay the keyboard flat
with other devices that have information. (See page 21.)
before opening the keyboard.
infrared data-transfer capability.
(See page 13.) 19 The volume control adjusts
(See page 68.)
the sound level for the built-in
5 The keyboard is used to enter
12 The built-in speakers speakers.
data into the computer. To use
reproduce computer sounds
the numeric keypad on the
such as beeps, music, or
keyboard, see page 29.
voices.

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 17

Identifying the Hardware Features

Rear View

Inside View Bottom View

1
1
2
2

4 5

18 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Identifying the Hardware Features

Rear View

1 The rear door covers the 6 The external-display 11 The headphone jack, a
connectors at the rear of the connector is where you 1/8-inch (3.5-mm) diameter
computer. connect the signal cable of jack, is where you connect a
VGA, SVGA, or compatible stereo headphone or external
2 The connector door allows
display. (See page 170.) speakers. (See page 71.)
you to connect a cable to the
system-expansion connector 7 The parallel connector is 12 The microphone/line-in jack,
when the rear door is closed. where you usually connect a a 1/8-inch (3.5-mm) diameter
parallel-printer signal cable. jack, is where a stereo
3 The rear infrared port. (See
microphone or external audio
“front infrared port” on page 8 The serial connector is
device is connected. (See
17.) where you connect a 9-pin,
page 71.)
serial-device cable.
4 The system-expansion
13 The modem/fax port is where
connector is used to connect 9 The power jack is where the
you connect a modem
the IBM Dock I, Dock II, or port AC Adapter cable is
connector or attachment. This
replicator. (See page 175.) connected.
is offered as an option in some
5 The power shutdown switch 1 The option cover can be countries.
is used to turn the computer off removed when options are (For use: see page 71. For
when an application locks up used in the UltraBay. installation: see page 163.)
or the computer will not accept
14 The power switch turns the
any input. Use the tip of a pen
computer on and off.
to press this switch.

Inside View

1 The modem/fax port release 3 The battery pack allows you 4 The security latch opens or
latch releases the modem/fax to operate the computer closes the security keyhole.
port from the computer. (See when ac power is not (See page 131.)
page 163.) available. (See page 24.)
5 The removable hard disk
2 The removable diskette drive. drive can be replaced with one
See page 17. (For installing of a different capacity. (See
options in the UltraBay: see page 149.)
page 159.)

Bottom View

1 The memory slot accepts one 2 The memory-slot cover is 3 The serial number (S/N)
or two memory module (DIMM) opened when you insert identifies your computer. Write
options to increase the memory DIMM options. (See page it down on page 237.
capacity of your computer. 142.)
(See page 142.)

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 19

System-Status Indicators

System-Status Indicators
The system-status indicators consist of three lamps and information
shown on a black-and-white LCD panel.

Indicator Lamps
The indicator lamps show the computer status by their on or off
states or by their colors (green or orange). Each indicator is
identified by a symbol.

The indicator lamps can be seen only when the LCD cover of the
computer is closed.

1 2 3

Symbol Color Meaning

1 Battery Green Enough battery power remains for operation.
Orange The battery pack is being charged.
Blinking orange The battery pack needs charging. When the lamp starts blinking
orange, the computer beeps three times.
2 Suspend mode Green Indicates that the computer is in suspend mode. See page 99 for
details about suspend mode.
Blinking green Indicates that the computer is entering suspend mode or
hibernation mode, or is resuming normal operation.
3 Power on Green Indicates that the computer is operational. This indicator is on
when the computer is on and not in suspend mode.

20 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 System-Status Indicators

LCD Indicator
The LCD indicator panel, which you can see when the LCD cover is
open, shows the status of the computer and the battery pack
installed in the computer.

The following shows the location and the meaning of each icon:

Icon Meaning
1 Speaker When enabled in the ThinkPad Features program, this indicator appears when
the speaker sounds. It turns off when any key is pressed. (To enable this
indicator, see “Using the ThinkPad Features Program” on page 38.)

2 Remaining battery The amount of remaining battery power is shown by a percentage (%), day (d),
hour (h), or numerical value (4:3 ).
For details, see page 88.
3 Secondary battery status Indicates the status of the battery pack installed in the UltraBay. For details, see
below.

4 Main battery status Indicates the following status of the battery pack in the battery pack bay.

The amount of remaining power (in five levels: – )

Charging status ( : charging, : discharging, and (blank): no activity)

For details, see page 88.
5 Diskette drive in use Appears when data is read from or written to a diskette. Do not enter suspend
mode or eject the diskette when this indicator appears.

6 Hard disk in use Appears when data is read from or written to the hard disk. Do not enter
suspend mode or turn off the computer when this indicator appears.

7 Numeric lock Indicates that the numeric keypad on the keyboard is enabled. The keypad is
enabled and disabled by pressing and holding the Shift key, and pressing the
NumLk key. For details, see “Operating the Numeric Keypad” on page 29.

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 21

System-Status Indicators

Icon Meaning
8 Caps lock Indicates that the Caps Lock mode is enabled. All alphabetic characters (A–Z)
are entered in capital letters without the use of the Shift key. The Caps Lock
A mode is enabled and disabled by pressing the Caps Lock key.

9 Scroll lock Alternately turns on and off each time the ScrLk key is pressed.
While this indicator is on, the Arrow keys are used as screen-scroll function keys.
In this state, the cursor cannot be moved with the Arrow keys. Not all application
programs support this function.

22 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Providing Power

Providing Power
Your computer can be operated with the AC Adapter, battery pack,
or Car Battery Adapter (available as an option).

AC Adapter
Note: The AC Adapter is an alternating-current-to-direct-current (ac-to-dc)
When the AC Adapter is connected, converter that supplies power for the computer. The AC Adapter
and the remaining power of the also charges the battery pack when the battery packs are installed in
installed battery pack is less than a
the computer. The input rating for the AC Adapter is 100–240 V ac,
certain amount, discharging and then
50/60 Hz.
charging of the battery pack starts
automatically.

DANGER

Do not attempt to open the AC Adapter case. The AC

Adapter is permanently sealed and cannot be repaired.

Warning: If you turn on the computer with the battery pack installed, you will
Always use an AC Adapter hear a short beep when you connect or disconnect the AC Adapter
certified by IBM in the country from the computer. This short beep means that the power source
where you will be using the has been changed.
computer. Operating the
computer with an incorrect AC
When the AC Adapter cable is disconnected from the computer with
Adapter can cause damage to the
a battery pack installed, the LCD brightness decreases slightly to
battery pack and to the computer.
conserve battery power.

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 23

Providing Power

To Wrap and Fasten the AC Adapter Cable

When you carry the AC Adapter with your computer, you can
wrap and fasten the cable as follows:

Battery Pack
The battery pack is an internal power source for the computer. The
battery pack can be recharged with the AC Adapter or the battery
charger (available as an option).
To charge the battery pack: Battery packs are shipped from the factory in an almost discharged
Page 84. state, so you must charge them before use. To operate your
computer with the battery pack, see Chapter 4.

You can use the following battery pack for your computer.
Lithium Ion Battery Pack

24 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Providing Power

The following table shows the operating time of the computer with a
fully charged lithium ion battery pack:
Note:
Battery operating time depends on Battery Operating Time
the options used with the computer, ThinkPad 760C With One Battery With Two Battery
the frequency of key input, Pack Packs
applications, and the configuration of
the system, so your battery operating Model with
3.8—10.0 hours 7.6—20.0 hours
time might be shorter or longer than 10.4-inch LCD
the listed times.
Model with
3.5—9.0 hours 7.0—18.0 hours
12.1-inch LCD

For Your Information

Standby Battery: Your computer has another rechargeable

battery, called the standby battery. It supplies the necessary
power to save data when a battery pack is replaced during
suspend mode. The standby battery can be replaced only by
your IBM authorized reseller or IBM marketing representative. To
charge the standby battery, connect the AC Adapter to the
computer. When using the computer for the first time, let the
battery charge for at least 8 hours to allow it to become fully
charged.

Car Battery Adapter

The Car Battery Adapter, available as an option, plugs into the
cigarette lighter socket of a car and supplies power to your computer.

See the manual supplied with the Car Battery Adapter for details.

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 25

Using the TrackPoint III

Operating with the TrackPoint III

Note: The keyboard contains a unique cursor-pointing device called the
No other software is required for the TrackPoint III. Pointing, selecting, and dragging all become part of a
TrackPoint III; it works with the PS/2 single process you can perform without moving your fingers from
mouse driver.
their typing position.

The TrackPoint III consists of a stick 1 on the keyboard and a pair

of click buttons 2 below the keyboard. The motion of the cursor
on the screen is controlled by the amount of pressure applied to the
nonslip cap on the stick in any direction parallel to the keyboard; the
stick does not move. The speed at which the cursor moves
corresponds to the amount of pressure on the stick. The function of
the click buttons depends on the software that is used.

26 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using the TrackPoint III

If you are not familiar with using the TrackPoint III, these instructions
will help you get started:

Note:
Remember that the stick does not 1 Place your hands in the typing position and press gently
move, and your finger should not on the stick with either index finger in the direction in
move on it. which you want the cursor to move.
Pressing the stick away from you moves the cursor up the
Note:
screen; pressing it toward you moves the cursor down the
The mouse cursor may drift in some
computer conditions. This is not a screen. You can also move the cursor side to side by
defect. Do not use the TrackPoint III pressing sideways.
until the pointer stops moving.
2 Press the click buttons with either thumb to select and
drag as required by your software, as with any other
pointing device.
Note: Hints and Tips
When you are not using the You can easily drag an item across the screen without constantly
TrackPoint III, for example, when the pressing the click buttons of the TrackPoint III. To drag and drop an
power is off, do not leave the click object, press the click button and slide it toward the front of the
button locked. computer. The click button locks in place; you can now drag the object
across the screen with the TrackPoint III stick without holding down the
click button.

To release the latch, push the click button backwards.

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 27

Using the TrackPoint III

Changing the Cap

The cap 1 on the end of the TrackPoint III is removable. You can
replace it with one of the spares shipped with your computer.

28 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Operating the Numeric Keypad

Operating the Numeric Keypad

The keyboard has some keys that, when enabled, work as if they
were a 10-key numeric keypad. (The numeric keypad on the
keyboard is not active when the external keyboard or the external
numeric keypad is attached to the computer.)

To enable the numeric keypad, press and hold Shift and then press
NumLk.
NumLk

7 8 9 /

4 5 6 *

1 2 3 -

0 . +

When the keypad is enabled, press and hold Shift to temporarily

use the cursor- and screen-control keys.
NumLk

Home PgUp /

End PgDn -

Ins Del +

To disable the numeric keypad, press and hold Shift; then press
NumLk again.

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 29

Using the Display

Using the Display

The color LCD of your computer supports SVGA mode (800-by-600
video resolution) with up to 65 536 colors.
To attach the external display: When you attach an external display that supports higher resolution
Page 170. than VGA mode, you can get a maximum of 1024-by-768 video
resolution.
To change the display mode: To display computer output on an external display, you need to set
Page 171. the appropriate display mode. You can select one of the following
display modes:
LCD only: The computer output is displayed only on the LCD.
CRT only: The computer output is displayed only on the
attached external display.
If no external display is attached to the computer and the display
mode is set to CRT only, the output is displayed on the LCD.
Both: The computer output is displayed on both the LCD and
the external display.

30 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using the Display

Using a DOS Application with Your Computer

When you use a DOS application that supports only VGA mode
(640-by-480 resolution) with your computer, the screen image might
look slightly distorted or might appear smaller than the display size,
as shown in the following table. This is to maintain compatibility with
DOS applications.
PS2 command for screen expansion: The screen expansion function in the ThinkPad Features program
Page 277. lets you set the screen image to the same size as the actual screen
size, but it may look slightly distorted, except when display mode is
Note: set to “CRT only”.
When display mode is set to
640-by-480 resolution and 65 536
colors, screen expansion is not
available.

Warning: If screen expansion is set to off, the screen image appears as

* When you select Both, do not follows:
attach an external display that
supports only VGA mode
Display Mode
(640-by-480 resolution).
Otherwise, the external display Both *
screen will be scrambled and the
LCD only CRT only On the
output will not be displayed, or the
On the LCD external
screen might be damaged.
display

640 x 480 640 x 480 640 x 480 640 x 480

The screen The screen The screen The screen

image appears image is the image appears image appears
in the center same size as in the center in the center
of the LCD the actual of the LCD of the LCD
and is smaller screen size. and is smaller and is smaller
than the actual than the actual than the actual
LCD size. LCD size. LCD size.

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 31

Using the Online Book

Viewing the Online Book

Note: You can view this User's Guide online to retrieve information about
The online book is not available in all the computer. The online book provides a very easy way of getting
countries. needed information when you are traveling.

Starting in OS/2 or Windows

OS/2 WIN
Click on the Online Book icon.

DOS
Starting in DOS
1 Type CD\READIBM at the command prompt and press
Enter.

2 Type READIBM and press Enter.

The menu for the online book appears. Choose any subject
from the menu.

Hints and Tips

You can leave a “bookmark” or write notes as you read through the
online book:
To close the book with a bookmark, select Place closing bookmark
when you exit the online book.
To write notes:
1. Position the cursor at the place where you want to write a note.
2. Select Notes from the action bar; then select Create... from the
pull-down menu.
3. Write any note; then save it.

A symbol (>) is placed next to where you left the note. To read the
note, select Display/Edit... from the Note pull-down menu.

32 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Keeping the Computer from Being Damaged

Keeping the Computer from Being Damaged

Your computer is a delicate device that requires careful handling. To
keep it from being damaged, keep these precautions in mind:

Do not apply any shocks to your computer.

Do not place anything heavy on your computer.
Do not pour liquid into your computer.
Do not leave any objects (especially metal objects) in the computer.
Keep the computer at least 13 cm (5 in.) away from any electrical
appliance that generates a strong magnetic field such as a motor,
magnet, TV, refrigerator, or large audio speakers.
Use your computer when temperatures are between 5°C to 35°C (41°F
to 95°F).
Do not disassemble the computer.
Do not scratch, twist, hit, or push the surface of the LCD.
Remove the battery pack and keep it in a cool place if you will not be
using the computer for a long period of time.

The removable hard disk drive and diskette drive are also very
delicate devices that need careful handling. To avoid damage, do
not press on them, drop them, or apply any shock to them when they
are removed from the computer.

Do not press on the middle part of the diskette drive.

Insert a diskette straight into the diskette drive. Inserting it at an angle
can damage the front of the diskette drive.
Do not place more than one diskette label on a diskette. Two or more
labels can cause a label to tear apart inside the drive and cause
damage to the diskette drive.

Occasionally clean your computer as follows:

Use a soft cloth moistened with nonalkaline detergent to wipe the

exterior of the computer.
Gently wipe the LCD with a dry, soft cloth. Do not use alcohol or
detergent.

Chapter 2. Getting Familiar with Your Computer 33

Carrying the Computer

Carrying the Computer

When carrying your computer, follow these instructions to prevent
possible damage to your computer and data:

Note:
To reduce the weight of the 1 Remove any diskette from the diskette drive.
computer when traveling, remove the
diskette drive if you will not be using 2 Turn off all attached devices.
it.
3 Turn off the computer and close the LCD.
To remove the diskette drive:
Page 159. 4 Unplug all external cables and cords connected to the
computer.

5 Make sure all computer doors and covers are closed.

For Your Information
1. You should occasionally back up data from the hard disk to
diskettes or tapes.
2. To use the AC Adapter outside your home country, you need
an ac power cord that is certified for the country you are
visiting. You can purchase one through IBM authorized
reseller or IBM marketing representative in that country. For
information about power cords, see “IBM Power Cords” on
page 284.
3. A carrying case is available from your IBM authorized reseller
or IBM marketing representative.

34 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer

This chapter provides information about the use of your computer.

What Happens When Power Is Turned On? . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Using the ThinkPad Features Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Starting the ThinkPad Features Program . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Starting the Program for OS/2 and Microsoft Windows . . 39
Starting the Program in DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using Easy-Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Starting Easy-Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using the Selectable Drive-Startup Sequence . . . . . . . . . 49
Changing the Startup Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Selecting the Network RPL Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Using the Fn Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
PC Card Limitations under Suspend Mode . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using the PC Card Director Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Starting PC Card Director for OS/2 or Windows . . . . . . . 55
Details about the Displayed Information . . . . . . . . . . 56
Setting the Power for a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Starting the PC Card Director Launcher . . . . . . . . . . 60
Displaying a List of Registered PC Cards . . . . . . . . . 62
Setting the Memory Area for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Changing the PC Card Director View . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
ATA Card Mount Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
The Auto Configurator Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Starting PC Card Director for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
ATA Card Mount Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Using the Infrared Communication Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Considerations for Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using the Mwave DSP Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Using the Audio Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Using the Function for OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Using the Function for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Using the Function for Windows or WIN-OS/2 . . . . . . . 76
Using the Telephony Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Connecting the Telephone Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Mwave Data Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Using Country Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Mwave Fax Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 35

Carrying the Computer

Mwave Telephone Answering Machine . . . . . . . . . . . 82

36 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What Happens after Power-On?

What Happens When Power Is Turned On?

You see one of the following prompts when the computer is turned on:

An operating system screen appears when the computer is operating

correctly. The screen you see may differ depending on your operating
system.

An operating system screen

This screen appears when an operating system is not found. It instructs you
to insert a self-starting diskette into the diskette drive and press F1 to start
the diskette. The order in which the computer checks the drives for an
F1
operating system is set in the drive-startup sequence. See “Using the
F2 F10

Selectable Drive-Startup Sequence” on page 49 for more information.

This screen instructs you to set the date and time for the first time. Enter the
1995 .12.31 date and time (see page 46); then press Enter.
Year Month Day

23:59:59
Hour Month Second

This screen indicates that a failure occurred during the power-on self-test
(POST). See page 222 for the necessary actions.
ERROR

OK Cancel

This icon appears when a power-on password is set. To start the computer,
enter the correct password.

This icon appears when a hard disk password is set. To unlock the hard disk
drive, enter the correct password.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 37

Using the ThinkPad Features Program

Using the ThinkPad Features Program

Note: ThinkPad Features is a program that allows you to select various
When installing an operating system, features for your computer such as:
you must also install the ThinkPad
Features program. Power management
– Power mode
To install the ThinkPad Features – Suspend and hibernation options
program: – Resume options
Chapter 7. – Power for devices
Alarm
– Speaker indicator setting
– Low-battery alarm
Display
– Resolution and color depth settings
– External monitor settings
Fuel-Gauge program: Fuel-Gauge program
Page 92.
– Remaining power percentage
– Current power mode
– Discharge options
Docking Control
For information on how to dock or undock the computer using
this feature, refer to the documents supplied with the Dock II
option.
Built-in device setup
– Port settings (serial, parallel, or infrared)
Personalization Editor program: Personalization Utilities
Page 127.
– Personalization Editor
– Update Utility

38 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using the ThinkPad Features Program

Starting the ThinkPad Features Program

The way you start the ThinkPad Features program depends on the
operating system.

O S / 2
Starting the Program for OS/2 and Microsoft Windows
WIN
If you are using OS/2 or Windows, you can use the ThinkPad
Features program with a user-friendly graphical user interface. You
can select or change any option in the ThinkPad Features program
by simply clicking on the buttons on the screen with a pointing
device. You can also specify features by entering the appropriate
PS2 commands at the command prompt (see page Appendix D,
“Using PS2 Commands” on page 273).

ThinkPad Features program has two views, the Tool Bar view and
the ThinkPad view.
Tool Bar View
ThinkPad Features

In the Tool Bar view, you can:

– Change the system configuration by one touch of the
one-touch button.
– Change the power mode for battery operation.
– Change the display device to display information on the LCD,
external display, or both.
– Enable presentation mode, which will disable the timers, so
the LCD will not turn off or the computer will not enter the
power-saving modes during a presentation.
When you press the maximize button in the top-right corner ( ),
the ThinkPad view is displayed.
For explanations of the buttons, see the figure on page 40.
ThinkPad View
In the ThinkPad view, you can:
– Customize the settings for the one-touch setup buttons.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 39

Using the ThinkPad Features Program

– View or set the configuration for the built-in devices. This

allows you to detect or resolve system resource conflicts.
For your information
A Help button is available on the screen. For additional
information on each menu item, click on the help button.

When you press the maximize button while in the tool bar view, you
see the following screen (any buttons on the screen that appear in
gray are options that cannot be set):

2 3
ThinkPad Features
1 4

7 5

Default Cancel

6
1 One-touch setup buttons
Click on one of the buttons to set the system configuration

automatically to fit your office ( ), or your home ( ), or to

customize it ( ).
2 Power mode buttons for battery operation
Click on one of the buttons to set the power mode for battery

operation to high performance mode ( ), automatic mode

( ), or customized mode ( ).

40 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using the ThinkPad Features Program

3 Display device buttons

Click on one of the buttons to set the display mode to the LCD

( ), external display ( ), or both ( ).

When making a presentation, you can click on the presentation
button ( ) to disable any system timers, such as turning the
LCD off or entering a power-saving mode.
4 Click on the left button for help. Click on the right button to save
the changes made and to exit the ThinkPad Feature window.
5 View angle buttons
Click on the buttons representing the front, rear, or interior view
to display the choices and options from that computer view.
6 Status bar
When you place the cursor on a device button, the status of the
device name and its status appear on this status bar.
7 Device buttons
Click on the button of your choice from the screen; then set the
options for that device in the window that appears.
When the device is enabled, the red indicator next to the icon is
lit. Otherwise, it is disabled.

Click on the Cancel button to exit the ThinkPad Features program

without saving the changes. Click on the Default button to set the
default values for each option and cancel the changes you have
made.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 41

Using the ThinkPad Features Program

Starting the Program in DOS

DOS
The ThinkPad Features program for DOS is a command line
interface, so you can specify features by entering appropriate
Notes: commands. Type PS2 ? at the DOS prompt to display the ThinkPad
Features online help.
1. You can use the PS2 commands
from the DOS prompt in OS/2 or
Windows.
2. This menu screen might look C:\> PS2 ?
different on your system.
(C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1993,1995. All rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication
or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.

Command Syntax: PS2 [Parameter1] [Parameter2] [Parameter3]

Following are available [Parameter1].

For the complete command syntax, type ‘PS2 ? [Parameter]’.

1.Power Management related

You can select an item from the menu and follow the instructions on
the screen to set any of the features. For details on the commands,
see Appendix D, “Using PS2 Commands” on page 273.

You can create a batch file to set your unique operating environment
quickly and easily.

42 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using the ThinkPad Features Program

Note: The following example batch file allows you to set up an operational
Refer to the manuals supplied with environment that is suitable for traveling and can result in longer
the operating system for more battery operation time.
information on batch files.

@Echo Off

Rem SAMPLE: Set the parameters to provide maximum power utilization.

Rem ================================================================

PS2 PMode Auto > Nul

PS2 LCd 3 > Nul
PS2 DISK 3 > Nul
PS2 POwer 5 > Nul
PS2 SPeed Fixed MIN > Nul
PS2 STandby 3 > Nul
PS2 IR OFf > Nul
PS2 CARD OFf > Nul
PS2 SErial OFf > Nul

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 43

Using Easy-Setup

Using Easy-Setup
The computer has a built-in system setup function called
Easy-Setup. Easy-Setup allows you to set the date and time,
passwords, the startup sequence of the drives, and hardware
configurations. Easy-Setup also runs the diagnostics.

Starting Easy-Setup
To start Easy-Setup:

1 Turn off the computer.

2 Remove any diskette from the diskette drive.
Note:
You can change the screen color of 3 Press and hold F1; then turn on the computer. Hold F1
the Easy-Setup menu with the key until the Easy-Setup menu appears.
combinations of Ctrl+PgUp or
Ctrl+PgDn. Use Ctrl+Home to
restore the original screen color.
Easy-Setup

Config Date/Time Password Start up Test

Restart

44 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Easy-Setup

To select an item from the Easy-Setup menu, move the pointer with
a pointing device to the item and click on the item or use the
keyboard as follows:
Arrow keys (↑↓←→ ): Highlight the item from the menu.
Spacebar: Selects the item.
Enter key: Enters the next menu, or saves the changes and
exits the menu.
Esc key: Returns to the previous menu, or cancels the
changes.

Config contains the following:

Config Memory SystemBoard Initialize

Exit

Memory shows the amount of installed memory and available

memory.
Memory

SystemBoard provides information about the installed system

board.
System
Board

Initialize sets all items that have been changed back to their default
values.
Initialize
After verifying your selections, click on OK or press Enter. To
cancel the selections, press Esc.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 45

Using Easy-Setup

Date/Time is used to set the current date and time.

1995 .12.31
Date/Time

23:59:59

Select any field (Year, Month, Date, Hour, Minute, or Second) with
the Arrow keys or pointing device; then type or click on the or
icon to change the setting. Clicking on the or icon changes
the setting more quickly.

After verifying the selection, click on OK or press Enter. To cancel

the setting, click on Cancel or press Esc.

Password is used to set:

Power-on password
Hard disk password
Password
– HDD-1 for the hard disk in the hard disk drive bay
– HDD-2 for the secondary hard disk in the UltraBay
Supervisor password

1 2

Power-On HDD-1 HDD-2 Supervisor

OK Cancel

For more information about passwords, see Chapter 5.

46 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Easy-Setup

Start up is used to change the startup sequence of your computer.

1 2 3

Start

3 4

HDD-3 HDD-4 PCMCIA

Note: The HDD-1 icon represents the internal hard disk drive installed in
For more information about the the computer. The other numbered HDD icons are external hard
startup sequence, see “Using the disk drives. FDD-1 represents the first diskette drive found during
Selectable Drive-Startup Sequence”
system startup. When no diskette drive is installed and if an
on page 49.
attached expansion unit (Dock I or Dock II) has a diskette drive, the
diskette drive in Dock I or Dock II will be the first drive.

Select Test to test the computer hardware.

Test Start Restart

1 1 1
Note: SystemBoard Memory Display HDD-1 FDD-1 PCMCIA-1 Parallel
The FDD-1 and HDD-1 icons
2
represent the diskette drive and hard
Serial DSP CD-ROM Infrared Audio HDD-2
disk drive of the computer,
respectively. The FDD-2 and HDD-3 2
3 2
icons represent the externally
HDD-3 FDD-2 PCMCIA-2
attached diskette drive and hard disk
drives. The HDD-2 icon represents
Exit
the hard disk drive in the UltraBay.

For more information, see “Testing the Computer” on page 215.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 47

Using Easy-Setup

Click on Restart to restart the computer after you have made your
selections. Then press Enter or click on OK.

Restart

48 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Easy-Setup

Using the Selectable Drive-Startup Sequence

Warning: Selectable drive startup (selectable boot) allows you to control the
If you change your startup startup sequence of the drives in your computer. The order in which
sequence, you must be extremely the computer searches the drives for your operating system is the
careful when you do write drive-startup sequence. If you are working with multiple operating
operations (such as copying,
systems, you might want to change the drive-startup sequence to
saving, or formatting). Your data
load an operating system from the hard disk or a PC Card without
or programs can be overwritten if
you select the wrong drive. checking the diskette drive, or to do a remote program load (RPL).

Changing the Startup Sequence

To change the startup sequence:

To start Easy-Setup:
Page 44.
1 Start Easy-Setup and select the Start up icon.
2 Move the cursor to the Reset icon; then press the
Spacebar.
The sequence is reset, and all available device icons appear
at the bottom of the screen. For the meaning of the icons, see
page 47.
Note:
You cannot set a hard disk drive 3 Move the cursor to the icon for the first device in the
before a PCMCIA in the startup startup sequence; then press the Spacebar.
sequence.
Repeat this step to set the other devices for the startup
sequence. You can set up to four devices.

4 Click on OK or press Enter to save the change.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 49

Using Easy-Setup

Selecting the Network RPL Speed

When you use a remote program load through a token-ring card or
other network card, the RPL speed can be selected.

1 Start Easy-Setup and select the Start up icon.

2 Move the cursor to the Network icon; then press the
Spacebar.
The window to select the token-ring RPL speed appears.

3 Move the cursor to the 4 icon or the 16 icon; then press

the Spacebar and press Enter.
If you are using another card, such as an Ethernet card, press
Esc to exit this window.

50 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using the Fn Key

Using the Fn Key

The Fn key function allows you to change operational features
instantly. When you use the following functions, press and hold the
Fn key 1 ; then press the appropriate function key 2 (F1 to F12;
and PgUp or PgDn).
2

Note: Hints and Tips

To use the Fn Key Lock Fn key Using the Fn Key Lock Fn Key Function: You only need to press Fn
function, select Keyboard/Pointing once to get the same effect as when you press and hold the Fn key.
Device from the Setup menu in the After you press a function key in the top row, Fn returns to its normal
ThinkPad Features program window, state.
or type PS2 FNS E at the command
prompt.

Key Combination Feature Meaning

Reserved —
Fn + F 1

Fuel-Gauge display The Fuel-Gauge program must be activated before you can use this key
Fn
+ F2 on or off combination.
When this key combination is pressed:
For OS/2 or Windows users: The window for the battery power status
appears or disappears. Parameters for power status can be set.
For DOS users: Power status information appears or disappears in the
top-right corner of the screen.
Standby mode Places the computer in standby mode. For more information about this
Fn F3
+ mode, see page 101.

Suspend mode Places the computer in suspend mode. For more information about this
Fn F4
+ mode, see page 101.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 51

Using the Fn Key

Key Combination Feature Meaning

Reserved —
Fn F 5
+
Reserved —
Fn + F 6

LCD/external Displays the computer output in the following order when an external display
Fn + F 7
display switching is attached.
External Both
Display

LCD
Reserved —
Fn F8
+
Reserved —
Fn + F 9

Reserved —
Fn + F 1 0

Power mode When this key combination is pressed during battery-power operation, the
Fn + F 11
switching power-management (power-saving) mode changes as follows.
High Auto

Customize
AC mode is used when the AC Adapter is attached. The Fuel-Gauge
program displays the current power option. See page 92.
Hibernation mode Places the computer in hibernation mode. See “Hibernation Mode” on
Fn + F 12
page 105 for more information.

PgUp
Dock I speaker Increases the speaker volume for Dock I attached to the computer.
Fn
+ volume up

Dock I speaker Decreases the speaker volume for Dock I attached to the computer.
Fn PgDn
+ volume down

52 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using PC Cards

Using PC Cards
To insert a PC Card: Your computer has two slots that allow you to install 68-pin, 85.6mm
Page 139. × 54.0mm (credit-card-size) PC Cards. With a PC Card, you can
send and receive faxes, communicate via a network, or store data.
PCMCIA standard:
Page 249. The PCMCIA slots of the computer conform to the PCMCIA
Standard Release 2.1 that is defined as the hardware layer of the
PCMCIA standard. Your computer also comes with the following
basic set of drivers:
Socket Services Release 2.1
Card Services Release 2.1
PC Card Director
PC Card Director: Card Services and Socket Services are the basic drivers required for
Page 54. all PC Cards. PC Card Director automatically identifies the type of
PC Card that has been inserted in a slot and sets it up so that you
can use the card immediately. It also provides you with an
entry-level security feature to protect unauthorized access to a
PCMCIA slot and installed PC Card.

The PCMCIA slots support Type I, Type II, and Type III PC Cards.
Ask IBM or an IBM authorized dealer for more information about the
different types of PC Cards.

For more information about PC Cards, see Appendix B.

PC Card Limitations under Suspend Mode

Some PC Cards can be inserted or removed without turning off the
computer (refer to the instructions that came with the PC Card), but
you cannot remove or install PC Cards during suspend mode.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 53

Using PC Cards

Using the PC Card Director Program

Note: Your computer comes with an advanced IBM program for PCMCIA
When installing an operating system, called PC Card Director that makes using PC Cards with your
install the PCMCIA device driver with computer easier by:
the PCMCIA Features Diskette to
use PC Card Director. Turning on and setting up a PC Card when you insert it in a
PCMCIA slot (Auto Configurator).
To install the PCMCIA device driver: Showing what type of PC Card is in your computer.
Chapter 7.
Notifying you with a message, sound, and icons whenever a
card is inserted or removed.
Allowing you to register an application program for a particular
PC Card and starting the program automatically when the card
is inserted.
Note: Some PC Cards come with their own device driver that will set them
The PCMCIA.CRD file does not up just like PC Card Director does. However, if these cards are
always list the latest PC Cards. If supported by PC Card Director, you will not need their device
your PC Card is not listed, try using
drivers. The PC Cards that PC Card Director supports are listed in
it with PC Card Director anyway.
the PCMCIA.CRD file on the Utility Diskette.

If your PC Card is not supported by PC Card Director, you must

install the driver that came with your card. The card driver must be
compatible with the PCMCIA Card Services Standard Release 2.1.
Follow the instructions in your PC Card manual to install the driver.

54 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using PC Cards

OS/2
Starting PC Card Director for OS/2 or
WIN
Windows
Starting PC Card Director for OS/2 and Windows is similar, but you
will see different screens.

To start PC Card Director, double-click on the PC Card Director

icon in the PC Card Director window according to your operating
system:

For OS/2:
PC CARD Director - Icon View

Mount Utility PC CARD Auto Configurator Utility

Director

Supported PC Cards

For Windows:
PC Card Director

PC Card Driver’s Auto

Director Selector Configurator
Utility

ATA Mount PC Card Supported PC

Utility Director Cards
Launcher

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 55

Using PC Cards

Note: The following screen appears:

This screen might look different PC Card Director
depending on your operating system. Actions Help

No. Card Status Launcher

F: Hard Disk Ready Cardfile

COM2: Modem Ready Terminal

The name of a PC Card installed in a PC Card slot, the PC Card

status, and related applications are displayed.

Details about the Displayed Information

The PC Card Director window contains the following features:
PC Card Director
Actions Help

No. Card Status Launcher

F: Hard Disk Ready Cardfile

COM2: Modem Ready Terminal

1 2 3

1 The Card button You can register a name, select an icon

or application to run, or set the sound
for a PC Card installed in a PC Card
slot.
2 The Status button You can view the status of the installed
PC Card or read product information
about other PC Cards.
3 The Launcher button You can start the application on the PC
Card by pressing this button.

56 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using PC Cards

You can select other features from the pull-down menu, as shown.
PC Card Director
Actions Help
Control Power...
Set Status Notice...
Start Launcher...
View Card List...
View Card Services Resources...
Set Memory Area... Ready Cardfile
Exit

COM2: Modem Ready Terminal

You can also select the same features by pressing the buttons on
the tools bar. To view a description of each button on the tools bar,
press the right mouse button.
PC Card Director
Actions Help

Control Power Card Status Launcher

F: Hard Disk Ready Cardfile

COM2: Modem Ready Terminal

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 57

Using PC Cards

These are the descriptions of each feature you can choose from the
pull-down menu or tools-bar buttons.

To control power: Control Power

Page 59. You can turn the power on for a PC Card installed in a PC Card
slot, or you can turn it off, without removing the PC Card from the
slot.

Set Status Notice

You can choose how you are to be notified when a PC Card is
removed from or installed in a PC Card slot.
Note: Open PC Card Director Folder
This option is only for OS/2. Opens the PC Card Director folder.
Note: Start Launcher
This option is only for Windows. Runs the PC Card Director Launcher.

To start launcher:
Page 60.
To view card list: View Card List
Page 62. Displays a list of the PC Cards registered in PC Card Director.

View Card Services Resources

Displays the resource information controlled by Card Services (for
example, the IRQ level or memory) or the release version notice for
Card Services.
Note: Set Memory Area...
This option is only for Windows. Sets the memory area for Card Services, PC Card, or Upper
Memory Block (UMB).
To set memory area:
Page 63. Supported PC Card Information
Displays the list of the PC Cards that are ready to be used by PC
Card Director.

58 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using PC Cards

Note: Change View

This option is only for OS/2. Switches between displaying the PC Card information and displaying
it in icons.
To change view:
Page 64. Security
Sets the security feature to on or off. You can also set the security
options and password, which control access to the PCMCIA slot and
installed PC Card.

O S / 2
Setting the Power for a PC Card
W IN
You can turn the power on or off for a PC Card installed in a PC
Card slot, without removing the PC Card from its slot. Controlling
the power for the PC Card helps conserve battery power.
Select Control Power... from the Actions pull-down menu, or click
on the left-most icon in the tools bar. The Control Power window
appears:
Note:
“No. 1” is the upper PC Card slot,
and “No. 2” is the lower PC Card
slot.

Select All

On Off Exit Help

To turn off the power to a PC Card:

Note: 1. Open the Control Power window.
Finish and close the application 2. Select the PC Card for which you want to turn power off.
program that the PC Card is using 3. Click on the Off button.
before turning off the power to that
PC Card.
To turn on the power to a PC Card:
1. Open the Control Power window.
2. Select the PC Card for which you want to turn power on.
3. Click on the On button.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 59

Using PC Cards

Starting the PC Card Director Launcher

WIN A launcher is installed with PC Card Director for Windows. By
launching (registering) an application often used by the PC Card,
Note: you can run the application with a click of a button.
OS/2 Warp Version 3 includes a
LaunchPad. Refer to the manuals To register an application to run automatically:
supplied with the operating system.

1 Start PC Card Director Launcher.

Select Start Launcher... from the Actions pull-down menu,
click on the tools button, or click on the PC Card Director
Launcher icon.

2 Select the Launcher Settings button (the right-most

button) in the PC Card Director Launcher window.
PC Card Director Launcher

3 Select New from the Launcher List of the Launcher

Settings window.

Application...

Icon...

Remove Browse...

OK Cancel Help

60 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using PC Cards

4 Click on the Application... button in the Launch

Application box.
You can also fill in the information for Title, Icon, and
Command Line.

5 Select an application in the Select Application window;

then click on Select.

Group :
Accessories
Applications :

Write
Select

Paintbrush Cancel

Paint Shop Pro Help

Terminal

Object Packager

6 Click on the Add (>>) button.

The application is added to the Launcher list.

7 Click on the OK button.

You have registered the application. Refer to the Help menu for
more information.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 61

Using PC Cards

Displaying a List of Registered PC Cards

OS/2
WIN To view a PC Card name and its product information once it is
registered, select View Card List... from the Actions pull-down
menu of the PC Card Director window, or click on the tools button.

Setting... Remove Exit Help

Setting... Displays the following information about a PC Card:

– Name of the PC Card
– Product information
– Icon of the PC Card type
– Applications registered to run automatically
– WAV files registered to play automatically
Remove Deletes the selected PC Card from PC Card Director.

62 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using PC Cards

Setting the Memory Area for Windows

WIN If you are using Windows, you can set the memory area used by the
PC Card and Card Services.

The PC Card and Card Services use a memory area called the UMB
(upper memory block). The UMB is used by various devices or
programs, and as an result, memory area conflicts often occur. With
PC Card Director, you can avoid these conflicts by easily setting the
UMB for the PC Card and Card Services.

To set the memory area used for the PC Card and Card Services, do
the following:

1 Select Set Memory Area... from the Actions pull-down

menu of the PC Card Director window or click on the
tools button for it.
Setup Upper Memory Block

Total Memory Size for PC cards Unspecified

PC cards

Used

OK Cancel Help

2 Plan carefully which memory area to use for the PC Card

and Card Services from the displayed information.

3 Using the mouse, click on the desired memory area for

the PC Card and Card Services.

4 Click on the OK button.

5 Restart the system.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 63

Using PC Cards

Changing the PC Card Director View

OS/2
WIN You can display the information in PC Card Director in detail or
using icons. The following is an example of what you see when PC
Card Director is displayed in icons:

If you are using OS/2:

To display information in icons, click on the Change View button
from the tools bar, or select Change View from the Actions
pull-down menu.
To display information in detail, click on the minimized PC Card
Director icon with the right-mouse button; then select Change
View.
To set the options for the displayed information when PC Card
Director is displayed in an icon, click on the minimized PC Card
Director icon with the right-mouse button; then select Display
Change in Status.

If you are using Windows:

To display information using icons, click on the minimize button
( ) in the upper-right corner of the window.
To display information in detail, click on the maximize button ( ).

64 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using PC Cards

ATA Card Mount Utility

PCMCIA AT Attachment (ATA) cards can have a number of
partitions. The ATA Card Mount Utility assigns or removes a drive
letter to these partitions.
Note:
For the ATA Card Mount Utility for The main panel displays the information about the logical drives
DOS, see page 67. (partitions) that are ready to be mounted or dismounted. This is an
example of a Windows ATA Card Mount Utility screen:
For more information:
Page 249.

Select the logical drive with the arrow keys (↑ or ↓ ) or with the
mouse; then mount or dismount it by clicking on the MOUNT or
DISMOUNT button, or by selecting the choices from the pull-down
menu.
MOUNT Assigns a drive letter to the selected logical drive.
Select a drive letter in the dialog box. Then the drive
letter is mounted to the logical drive.
DISMOUNT Releases the drive letter from the selected logical
drive.

The Option pull-down menu contains the following:

Refresh Refreshes the list. Use this choice when you have
inserted or removed a PCMCIA ATA card in the PC
Card slot.
Exit/Quit Ends the program.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 65

Using PC Cards

The Auto Configurator Utility

The Auto Configurator has prepared a script file for configuring each
PC Card. These script files contain steps for enabling the PC Card
and the resource information for its I/O interrupt level or memory.
Note: The Auto Configurator Utility is a utility that edits these script files,
Refer to the PCMCIA.CRD file for a transforms them into binary data, and records them in Auto
list of PC Cards that Auto Configurator. Then Auto Configurator enables each PC Card, based
Configurator can enable. on the data in the card's script file.

For more information on how to use the Auto Configurator, see

Appendix B.

66 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using PC Cards

DOS
Starting PC Card Director for DOS
To start PC Card Director for DOS:

1 Go to the DOS command prompt.

C:\>
Note:
C:\THINKPAD is the directory where 2 Type C:\>C:\THINKPAD\EZPLAY at the command prompt;
PC Card Director is installed. If you then press Enter.
have installed it in a different
directory, type that directory name
instead.

The following screen appears:

Note:
Some PC Cards might not display PC Card Director
(C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1993,1995, Version 3.
any information in PC Card Director.
Card Services DOS Card Services Driver, Version 2.1 PCMCIA Card Services

Release 2.1 Revision 2.1

Slot Information

No. Status Card Type Card Information

-> 1 Ready Memory F: IBM 1MB SRAM 933152 933151

Enter F1=Help F3=End F9=Resources F1 =Client

ATA Card Mount Utility

For more information: PCMCIA ATA cards can have a number of partitions. The ATA
Page 249. Card Mount utility assigns (mounts) or removes (dismounts) a drive
letter to these partitions.

C:\THINKPAD is the directory where PC Card Director is installed. If

you have installed it in a different directory, type that directory name
instead.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 67

Communicating with the Infrared Port

Using the Infrared Communication Feature

Note: Your computer is equipped with an infrared (IR) communication
When installing an operating system, feature that allows point-to-point communication with other ThinkPad
you must install the infrared device computers or systems equipped with an infrared port. The computer
driver to use ThinkPad mode.
has two infrared ports, one in the front of the computer below the
hard disk drive compartment and another on the rear of the
To install the infrared device driver: computer.
For OS/2: page 188, and for
Windows: page 207. The infrared feature supports three modes with the following
communication speed in bits per second (bps):
Note: ThinkPad mode (IrDA High Speed extension) (1.15 Mbps)
Mbps: Mega bits per second
This mode is used when communicating with another 755 or
760 series IBM ThinkPad computer with an infrared port or
other systems supporting ThinkPad mode.
Generic (IrDA 1.0) (up to 115 000 bps)
This mode is used when communicating with other IBM
ThinkPad computers, Hewlett-Packard** 100LX**, 200LX**,
Omnibook**, or other systems with infrared ports supporting
Generic mode.
Sharp (ASK) (9600 bps)
This mode is used when communicating with the Sharp**
Wizard** or other systems with infrared ports supporting
Sharp mode.

The ThinkPad Features program contains a utility program that

enables the front or rear infrared port and sets the communication
speed.
If you are using OS/2 or Windows, see page 38.
PS2 command: If you are using DOS, type PS2 ? IR at the command prompt;
Page 42. then press Enter for more information.

68 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Communicating with the Infrared Port

During communication with rear infrared ports, the infrared ports

must face each other directly at a communicating distance.

It is recommended that you use the rear infrared port for

communicating between ThinkPad computers.
When communicating between a front infrared port and an
infrared port on another computer, the infrared ports on the
computers must face each other directly at a communicating
distance.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 69

Communicating with the Infrared Port

Communication can be affected by the light from the LCD on the

computer. To avoid this, open the LCD to a wide angle:

[Side view]

Considerations for Communication

Consider the following points when communicating with the infrared
ports:
You need to run the same communication application on both
computers to communicate between your computer and another
computer device. Refer to the application manuals for more
information.
Run only one communication application at a time that uses the
infrared ports.
When using applications that use a conventional serial port and
serial cable to exchange data, your computer infrared ports are
used as a replacement for the serial port and cable. In this case,
ThinkPad mode cannot be used.
The communicating distance might need to be less if:
– The other system is not the same model as your computer.
– There is interference from ambient light. It is recommended
that you do not use infrared communication in bright
sunshine or artificial light conditions.
– The infrared port is not directly facing the other
communicating port.
Headphones may interfere with infrared communications. You
might hear noise through the headphones, or the computer might
not be able to communicate with other devices through the
infrared port.

70 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Mwave DSP Audio Features

Using the Mwave DSP Features

Note: The computer provides the Media Processor (Mwave DSP) feature,
In some countries, the Mwave which is based on the digital signal processor (DSP). It gives you
telephony functions are only high performance for audio and telephony functions, and it supports
available with the DAA/Telephony Kit
a more natural way of communicating with your computer.
option installed.
The Mwave DSP system supports a full complement of audio and
Note: telephony functions, including the following:
For more information on MIDI, see
“Mwave MIDI Overview” on Audio
page 268.
– Supports wave audio recording and playback of up to 16
bits, stereo, and 44 kHz sampling
– Provides a high-quality MIDI wave table synthesizer with 128
instruments and up to 32 voices
– Supports DOS games using the Sound Blaster** interface
Telephony
– Supports data modems at up to 14 400 bps
– Supports fax modems at up to 14 400 bps
– Supports the speaker phone function
– Supports the telephone answering machine function

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 71

Using Mwave DSP Audio Features

This illustration shows the connections between the computer and

external cables or devices:

Microphone/Line-in
Jack

Modem/Fax Port
When the DAA/Telephony Kit is installed:

Headphone Microphone/Line-in
Jack Jack
Modem/Fax Port

Headset
Note:
Headset is available as an option Headphone
in some countries. Jack Data Access
Arrangement

72 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Mwave DSP Audio Features

Note: The Mwave DSP feature supports the following functions for each
When installing an operating system, operating system:
you must install the Mwave DSP
support software to use the Mwave For OS/2:
DSP features. – Wave audio recording and playback
– MIDI synthesizer
To install the Mwave DSP support – Sound Blaster support in the DOS session
software: – Data modem
Chapter 7. – Class II Fax
– MPEG Audio
For DOS:
– Sound Blaster support
– Data modem
For Windows:
– Wave audio recording and playback
– MIDI synthesizer
– Sound Blaster support in the DOS session
– Data modem
– Fax modem
– Speaker phone
– Telephone answering machine
– MPEG Audio

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 73

Using Mwave DSP Audio Features

Using the Audio Function

Use the Mwave audio functions according to your operating system.

OS/2
Using the Function for OS/2
The Mwave feature supports audio in the OS/2 environment through
Multimedia Presentation Manager/2 (MMPM/2). To use the Mwave
Note: audio functions with OS/2, refer to the MMPM/2 manuals.
Do not enter suspend mode when
using the audio functions. For Your Information
When you play audio files in the MMPM/2 environment, refer to
the following:
When you play the wave audio files, select the DIGITAL
AUDIO icon in the Multimedia folder.
When you play the MIDI sequencer files, select the MIDI icon
in the Multimedia folder.

DOS
Using the Function for DOS
The Mwave feature supports audio for DOS games through Sound
Blaster support.

To enable Sound Blaster support for DOS games:

1 Type FASTCFG at the command prompt; then press Enter.

The FASTCFG utility opens.

2 Select Games; then select OK.

74 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Mwave DSP Audio Features

Creating a Boot Diskette

If you do not have enough memory for your games, you should
make a boot diskette before starting the DOS games. To make a
boot diskette, do the following:

1 Turn on the computer and start DOS.

2 Insert a blank diskette into the diskette drive.

3 Type MAKEBOOT at the DOS prompt; then press Enter.

A boot diskette is created. Before starting your games, restart
the computer with this boot diskette inserted in the diskette
drive.

Some sample files, such as the CONFIG.SYS file, are created on

the boot diskette. You might need to modify these files by referring
to the manuals that came with your games.
Default Values for DOS Games Audio

Most games automatically determine the I/O address, interrupt level

(IRQ), and DMA channel settings for the audio for DOS games. If
the game asks for this information, specify the default settings for
Sound Blaster as follows:
I/O Address 220
IRQ 5
DMA Channel 1

If you need to change these settings:

Use the PS2 AUdio command to set the features for the audio
(see Appendix D, “Using PS2 Commands” on page 273 for
more details.)
Select DSP from the ThinkPad Setup window and set features
for the audio.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 75

Using Mwave DSP Audio Features

Using the Function for Windows or WIN-OS/2

WIN To use Mwave audio in Windows or WIN-OS/2, double-click on the
Mwave ThinkPad icon in the Windows Program Manager.
Note:
To use the Mwave audio features in A window similar to the following appears:
WIN-OS/2, install the Mwave DSP Mwave ThinkPad
support software for Windows in the
full screen WIN-OS/2 session.
?
To install the Mwave DSP support Modem Country
Selection
Mwave Help

software:
Chapter 7.

View Audio Control Read Me

Connectors

Audio Control When you double-click on the Audio Control icon,

the following window appears:

Mwave Audio Mixer

Controls Viewed:
INPUT SOURCE GAMES WAVE MIDI MASTER Play Record

Mic
Bass Treble
Tone Control
Line

CD
QSound
Chorus Reverb
Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute
Effects

76 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Mwave DSP Audio Features

This window allows you to control the audio volume:

Record
Enables you to select which source you want to use, to adjust
the record level, or to monitor the input signal.
Output
Allows you to adjust the balance and sound levels and to control
the mute option. It can be considered a stereo amplifier with
three input signals, controls to mix the input signals, and a
volume control for the output.

Playing the MIDI Sequencer Files

To play the MIDI sequencer files in Windows, use the Windows
Media Player:

1 Start Windows; then open the Accessories group.

2 Double-click on the Media Player icon.
3 When the Media Player window appears, select Device
on the menu bar; then select MIDI Sequencer... from
the pull-down menu.
Media Player

File Device Scale Help

Sound...
M I D I S e q u e n c e r. . .

4 Highlight your favorite MIDI file with your pointing device;

then click on OK.

5 To begin playing the MIDI file, click on the Play ( )

button.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 77

Using Mwave DSP Telephony Features

Using the Telephony Function

Note: The computer is equipped with a modem/fax port on its side that
In some countries, the Mwave connects a telephone cable. This section describes how to connect
telephony functions are only the cable to the computer, and describes the various telephony
available with the DAA/Telephony Kit
features that can be used for communication.
option installed. To install a
DAA/Telephony Kit on the computer,
CAUTION:
see “Installing the DAA/Telephony
Kit” on page 163 and the You computer can only use a public-switched telephone
documentation that came with the network (PSTN). Do not use a PBX (private branch exchange)
option. or other digital phone lines. Use of phone lines other than
PSTN can damage your modem. If you are not sure which kind
of phone line you are using, contact your telephone company.

Connecting the Telephone Cable

To use the telephony functions, you need to connect a telephone
line to your computer.

DANGER

To avoid shock hazard, do not connect the cable to or

disconnect the cable from the telephone outlet on the
wall during electrical storms.

Note: When your computer has a modem/fax port with a square

If you use both the computer and a receptacle, connect the ferrite-core end (connector 1 ) of the
telephone with one telephone cable, telephone cable to the modem/fax port; then connect the other end
use the telephone cable supplied
( 2 ) to the telephone outlet on the wall.
with your computer.
When you use the DAA/Telephony
Kit (available as an option), see page
165.

78 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Mwave DSP Telephony Features

Important
Make sure you use the correct telephone line so your modem
operates correctly. When you are:
At home: Use an analog line; a standard household
telephone.
In your office: Use a line connected to a fax machine or
another modem.
In a hotel: Request a room with a data or normal telephone
line.
Your RJ11 jack must be wired for an analog line. If you are not
sure what type of line you are connecting, check with the
telephone company.

DOS
Using for the Modem DOS
To start the Mwave modem for DOS, do the following:

1 Type FASTCFG at the DOS prompt; then press Enter.

The FASTCFG utility opens.

2 Select Advanced Modem; then select OK.

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 79

Using Mwave DSP Telephony Features

Mwave Data Modem

The Mwave telephony features support direct attachment to a
public-switched telephone network (PSTN). The Mwave data
modem supports the standard communication port interface and can
be used with the communications programs that use the Hayes** AT
command set.

The Mwave data modem provides the following features:

Standard asynchronous communications port interface
(NS16550A UART compatible) operation
Bell**-103/212A, ITU-T V.32bis protocols with data from 50 to
2400 bps
ITU-T V.32bis protocols with data rates of 4800, 9600 uncoded,
and 9600 bps Trellis coded (optional)
ITU-T V.32bis protocols with data rates of 4800, 7200, 9600,
12 000, and 14 400 bps (optional)
Hayes AT command set compatibility
Call progress monitoring
Automatic dialing
Dual-tone modulation frequency (DTMF) and pulse dialing
Asynchronous error recovery protocol
Error correction via Microcom Network Protocol (MNP**) classes
1–4
MNP class 5 for up to 2x data compression
Functional upgrades via software
ITU-T V.42bis error correction

80 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Mwave DSP Telephony Features

Using Country Selection

Important
Each country has restrictions on communications that use
telephone lines. Use this window whenever you travel to other
countries.

Note: The Country Selection window allows you to change the country
In some countries, the Mwave name currently supported by the Mwave telephony features. When
modem functions are only available you travel to other countries and use the Mwave telephony function,
with the DAA/Telephony Kit option is
you need to select the country name from the list of countries in this
installed.
window.

Mwave Fax Modem

The Mwave telephony features offer you the following fax functions:
Call progress monitoring
Automatic dialing
Support for a Windows MCI** FAX application interface
Use of direct memory access (DMA) instead of a
communications port to increase performance
DTMF and pulse dialing
G3 transfers
T.4/T.30 operations
V.27ter — 2400/4800 bps send/receive
V.29 — 7200/9600 bps send/receive
V.17 — 14400/14400 bps send/receive

Chapter 3. Operating Your Computer 81

Using Mwave DSP Telephony Features

Mwave Telephone Answering Machine

Note: The Mwave telephony features allow you to use the computer as a
When you use the telephone telephone answering machine by:
answering machine function, refer to
the manual that came with the Recording greetings and messages through the microphone
application program package.
Playing back greetings and messages through the speaker or
headphones
Playing back greetings and messages to a remote telephone
Recording messages from a remote telephone
Providing a full-duplex speaker phone capability using the
microphone and speaker
Supporting both tone (DTMF) and pulse dialing
Using voice compression to minimize disk space for stored
greetings and messages
Using a Windows MCI Telephony application program interface
Using a high-performance DMA interface
Speeding up or slowing down played messages without affecting
their pitch (TDHS)
Detecting DTMF digits received from phone line

82 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Chapter 4. Using Battery Power

This chapter describes battery pack operations.

Charging the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Charging with the AC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Charging with the Quick Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Replacing the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Monitoring the Battery Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using the Battery Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Battery Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Low-Battery Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Remaining Battery Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Using the Fuel-Gauge Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Discharging the Battery Pack for OS/2 and Windows . . . 95
Preserving Battery-Pack Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Maximizing Battery-Powered Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Using Advanced Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Decreasing LCD Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Using the Battery Power-Management Function . . . . . . . 99
Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Suspend Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Considerations for Suspend Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Hibernation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Creating the Hibernation File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Considerations for Hibernation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 83

Battery-Powered Operation

Charging the Battery Pack

Note: You can charge the battery pack when the AC Adapter is connected
When you charge the lithium ion to the computer and the battery pack is installed. You must charge
battery pack, the battery pack the battery pack in any of the following conditions:
temperature must be at least 10°C
(50°F). When a new battery pack is purchased.
When the battery status indicator starts blinking ( ).

Hints and Tips

You can use an optional battery pack and install it in the
UltraBay and have two battery packs for long battery-powered
operation.

When you have two battery packs installed in the computer and
start charging, charging starts on the battery pack in the battery
pack bay. When it is fully charged, charging starts on the battery
pack installed in the UltraBay.

Charging with the AC Adapter

Note: The following table shows the approximate charging times for the
When carrying your computer without battery pack.
the AC Adapter, carry with you a fully
charged battery pack for maximum
operating hours. You can also have Conditions Charging Time
an optional battery pack and use two Operational Charging 1.7 hours
battery packs for operation.
Power-off Charging 1.5 hours
When the AC Adapter is connected
and the power remaining in the Suspend-mode Charging 1.5 hours
installed battery pack is less than a
certain amount, discharging and then If the battery pack is new or has not been used for a long period of
charging of the battery pack starts time, it will not be fully charged with only a single charging. You will
automatically. The discharge LCD
have to discharge and recharge it three to six times to maximize
indicator appears . battery operating time.

84 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Battery-Powered Operation

The following describes how to recharge the battery pack with the
AC Adapter when the computer is turned off:

1 Make sure the computer is turned off, and a new or

discharged battery pack is installed in the computer.

2 Connect the AC Adapter to the computer.

The system status indicators show the following:

Indicator Meaning
The battery pack is being charged. The
charge indicator ( ) turns off when the
battery is fully charged.

Charging with the Quick Charger

The Quick Charger is available to charge the battery packs. For the
charging procedure, refer to the instructions supplied with the Quick
Charger.

The LCD indicator panel shows the following when using the Quick
Charger with the computer power on or off:

When power is on When power is off

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 85

Replacing the Battery Pack

Replacing the Battery Pack

A spare battery pack is available as an option. Replace the current
battery pack when it is low in power.

The battery pack can be replaced with computer power on or off. To

replace the battery pack without turning off the computer, follow
these instructions.

Important
If you are using PC Cards, either connect the AC Adapter or stop
the PC Card application and remove the PC Card before doing
the following.

1 Open the LCD so it lies flat; then slide the keyboard

raiser on the side of the computer toward you so the
keyboard lies flat on the computer.

2 Open the keyboard.

The computer automatically enters suspend mode. Wait for
the beep, which indicates that the computer has completely
entered suspend mode.

86 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Replacing the Battery Pack

3 Pull the battery pack toward the front of the computer;

then quickly remove the battery pack and replace it with
a fully charged spare.

2
1

4 Close the keyboard. The computer resumes normal

operation.
If the computer does not resume normal operation, press the
Fn key.

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 87

Using the Battery Status Indicator

Monitoring the Battery Status

Battery power conditions can be determined through the battery
status indicator and the Fuel-Gauge program.

Using the Battery Status Indicator

The main battery status indicator shows the current status of the
battery pack (only when the battery is installed).

Battery Status Indicator

Observe the main battery status indicator and compare it with
the status list below to determine the battery condition.

Indicator Remaining Status/Action Required

Power
(Percentage)
100%–75% The battery pack is fully charged.

75%–50%

50%–25% Enough power remains for computer

operation.
Less than
25 %

88 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using the Battery Status Indicator

Indicator Remaining Status/Action Required

Power
(Percentage)
Approximately The battery pack is almost discharged
(Blinking) 10 minutes and is about to enter the low-battery
Note:
remains for condition (see page 90).
When the AC Adapter is connected
operation.
and the power remaining in the You will hear three beeps when this
installed battery pack is less than a indicator turns on. Take either of the
certain amount, discharging and then following actions immediately:
charging of the battery pack starts Connect the AC Adapter to the
automatically. computer; leave the battery pack
installed.
Replace the battery pack with a fully
charged spare (see “Replacing the
Battery Pack” on page 86).
Percentage of (Only appears when the AC Adapter is
charging connected.)
completed. The battery pack is being charged. See
(Up to 100%) page 85 for more information.
Percentage of The battery pack is being discharged (or
discharging is being used). See page 95 for more
completed. information.
(Down to 0%)
Off — The battery pack is not installed.
(Not The computer is turned off.
displayed)

When using a secondary battery pack...

When you are using a secondary battery pack (available as an
option) in the UltraBay, the battery status indicator appears for
both battery packs installed in the computer.

The main battery-status indicator ( ) is for the battery pack

installed in the battery-pack bay, and the secondary
battery-status indicator ( ) is for the secondary battery pack
installed in the UltraBay.

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 89

Using the Battery Status Indicator

Low-Battery Condition

Warning: When the battery pack is low in power, the remaining battery
Do not leave the computer in this indicators start to blink. Ten seconds after the indicators start to
condition for an extended period blink, the computer sounds three consecutive beeps and the last
of time. Data in memory will be rectangle in the battery status indicator starts to blink ( ). The
lost.
battery pack needs to be charged immediately. If corrective actions
are not taken within 10 minutes, the computer will enter suspend
For necessary actions:
mode.
Page 89.

Remaining Battery Indicator

The remaining battery indicator shows the remaining battery status in
digits. This includes the overall power remaining for the battery pack
in the battery-pack bay (and the battery pack in the UltraBay, if
installed).

Refer to the following table to determine the remaining battery power:

Indicator Meaning
The remaining power is displayed in days.
In this example, battery power remaining is 2
days.
The remaining power is displayed in hours
and minutes. When the remaining power is
more than 10 hours, an “h” suffix appears

besides the number (for example, ).

In this example, battery power remaining is 2
hours and 50 minutes.

90 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using the Battery Status Indicator

Indicator Meaning
The remaining power is displayed in
percentage. When the charge symbol ( )
appears next to a battery status indicator, it
shows what percentage is complete.
In this example, battery pack charging
(indicated with the charge symbol), is 70%
complete, or 70% of battery power remains.
When using a secondary battery, the
percentage indicates the total remaining
power for both battery packs, up to 100%.

To change how to display the remaining power between the hours

and percent, select Option... from the pull-down menu of the
Fuel-Gauge program; then click on your choice to display the
remaining power.
Fuel
Restore
Move
Size
Minimize
Maximize
Option...
Close
Switch To...
About...

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 91

Using the Fuel-Gauge Program

OS/2
Using the Fuel-Gauge Program
WIN

Note: The Fuel-Gauge program displays the following battery-pack

When you install an operating conditions on the screen:
system, you must also install the
ThinkPad Features program with the Power mode
Utility Diskette before the Battery status
Fuel-Gauge program can be used. Suspend or hibernation options
Discharge option
To install the ThinkPad Features
program: The Fuel-Gauge program is available in OS/2 or Windows. When
Chapter 7. you click on the Fuel-Gauge icon in the ThinkPad Features window,
the Fuel-Gauge program appears. When you minimize the program
Note: to an icon, every time you press the Fn+F2 key combination, the
Repeatedly charging a battery pack Fuel-Gauge icon appears or disappears alternately from the screen.
that has not been completely
discharged shortens the battery Refer to the following descriptions and illustrations, which depend on
operating time. To preserve battery the power source, of the Fuel-Gauge program.
operating time, discharge the battery
pack completely, then recharge it.

Maximized Fuel-Gauge program:

– The “Duration of Remaining Power” does not appear when
the AC Adapter is connected.

AC Adapter Connected Battery Operation

70 %
[1:30]

92 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using the Fuel-Gauge Program

Minimized (to an icon) Fuel-Gauge program:

– The power source (AC Adapter or battery) and power mode
alternately appear:
- Power source
AC AC Adapter
BT Battery
- Power mode
HI High Performance
AU Automatic
CU Customized

AC Adapter connected Battery operation

Fuel

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 93

Using the Fuel-Gauge Program

When you have a secondary battery pack in the UltraBay, the

following figure is displayed for the Fuel-Gauge program.
Maximized Fuel-Gauge program:
– When you double-click on the power remaining percentage,
the percentage for the main battery pack (displayed with a
“1” in front), secondary battery pack (displayed with a “2” in
front), and the average of the two battery packs alternately
appear.
For example:
1 35% 2 49% 42%

AC Adapter connected Battery operation

Fuel Fuel

75% 75%
[2:20]
1 2 1 2

Minimized (to an icon) Fuel-Gauge program:

AC Adapter connected Battery operation

[2:20]

CU
HI 1 2
1 2 Fuel
Fuel

94 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using the Fuel-Gauge Program

Discharging the Battery Pack for OS/2 and Windows

When the battery pack needs to be discharged, the computer
prompts you with a message. To discharge the battery, connect the
AC Adapter to the computer and click on the discharge button ( )
on the Fuel-Gauge program.

When the power remaining for the installed battery pack is less than
a certain amount, discharging and then charging of the battery pack
starts automatically.

The discharge-in-progress ( ) appears above the gauge symbol,

and the charge button ( ) appears in place of the Discharge button.

On the system indicator panel, the indicator showing that the battery
pack is being discharged appears:

You can use the computer while the battery pack is discharging;
however, do not enter suspend mode or turn off the computer until
the discharge is complete.

When the battery pack is completely discharged, charging starts

automatically.

To cancel discharging, click on the charge icon ( ).

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 95

Maximizing Battery-Powered Operation

Preserving Battery-Pack Life

To preserve the life of the battery pack:

Warning: Do not charge the battery pack until all of its power is used.
Make sure the battery pack power
is completely used before you Once you have started charging the battery pack, do not use it
recharge it. Recharging a battery until it is fully charged.
pack that is not completely Discharge the battery pack occasionally by using the
discharged can shorten battery
Fuel-Gauge program.
life.
Turn off the computer whenever it is not in use.

Maximizing Battery-Powered Operation

To save battery power:
Use Advanced Power Management (APM)
Decrease the LCD brightness
Use the Battery Power-Management function

96 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Maximizing Battery-Powered Operation

Using Advanced Power Management

Note: The computer has power-management functions built in. No special
If you have purchased the computer power-management drivers have to be installed before you use the
with a preinstalled operating system, computer. However, the computer is able to conserve more power
APM is already installed correctly.
when APM is used.

APM allows you to reduce power consumption when your

applications and devices are idle. Each operating system comes
with its own APM.

If you are using OS/2, APM is automatically installed when the

O S / 2

installation program detects that the power-management function is

installed on your computer.

If you are using DOS, APM is automatically installed when the

DOS
installation program detects that the power-management function is
installed on your computer. To verify that the computer has APM
installed correctly, type power at the command prompt and press
Enter. If a screen similar to the following appears, APM is
successfully installed.
Power Management Status
-----------------------
Setting = ADV: REG
CPU: idle 32% of time.

AC Line Status : OFFLINE

Battery status : High

If not, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file, using a text
editor such as the DOS Editor.
DEVICE=C:\DOS\POWER.EXE

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 97

Maximizing Battery-Powered Operation

If you are using Windows, follow these instructions to check and

WIN install APM for Windows:
1. Start the system. Make sure that the current directory is
Windows (usually C:\WINDOWS>).
2. Type SETUP at the command prompt and press Enter. The
following screen appears.

Windows Setup
===============

If your computer or network appears on the Hardware Compatibility List

with an asterisk next to it, press F1 before continuing.

System Information
Computer: MS-DOS System
Display: Cyber932 8 ×6 256 small font
Mouse: Microsoft, or IBM PS/2

Note: 3. Using the Arrow keys (↑ , ↓ ), position the highlighted cursor over
If “MS-DOS System with APM” MS-DOS** System and press Enter.
appears for the item “Computer:”,
APM is already installed. Press F3 4. Position the highlighted cursor over MS-DOS System with APM
to exit the setup. and press Enter.
5. Verify that the item “Computer” has changed to
MS-DOS System with APM on the screen. If not, return to step
3.

Windows Setup
===============

If your computer or network appears on the Hardware Compatibility List

with an asterisk next to it, press F1 before continuing.

System Information
Computer: MS-DOS System with APM
Display: Cyber932 8 ×6 256 small font
Mouse: Microsoft, or IBM PS/2

6. Press Enter to install APM.

7. Restart the system to make APM effective.

98 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Power Management

Decreasing LCD Brightness

Adjust the brightness control on the LCD to the lowest level possible
that allows you to comfortably view the screen. This is an effective
way of conserving battery power.

Using the Battery Power-Management Function

Note: Your computer has the following built-in battery power-saving
When you install an operating functions to save power when you use the battery pack or AC
system, you must install the Adapter:
ThinkPad Features program using
the Utility Diskette. Operation modes. The operation modes control the processor
speed or set timers for saving power. For more information
To install the ThinkPad Features about the operation modes, see 2 on page 40.
program: Power-saving modes. The power-saving modes stop all tasks
Chapter 7. when the computer is not used for a specified time.
When resuming normal operation from one of the modes, use
the resume function to return to where you were when you
entered that mode. Because the operating system is already
loaded, the resume function is faster than turning the power on.

The following are the three power-saving modes:

Standby Mode You can enter standby mode for short idle times,
such as when you are having a short conversation.
Suspend Mode You can enter suspend mode for some what longer
times when you are away from your computer.
Hibernation Mode
You can enter hibernation mode when you leave
your office for the day.

It takes more time to return to normal operation from suspend mode

than to return from standby mode, but the computer does not use as
much power.

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 99

Using Power Management

The following figure shows the operations required when the

computer moves from a power-off condition to operation mode, and
vice versa. The battery shows the amount of battery power used in
each stage.

High Performance
Operation Mode Fn+F11 Automatic
Customized

Fn+F3
Timer*

Power Switch External Keyboard Any key

Power Ring Indicator*
Shutdown Fn key
Switch Timer*
Open LCD
Close Keyboard

Standby Mode
Power Fn+F4
Switch Timer*
Low Battery* Fn+F4
Fn+F12 Close LCD Timer*
Low Battery* Open Keyboard Low Battery*
Timer* Close LCD
Power Switch* Open Keyboard

Suspend Mode
Quick Suspend
RediSafe Suspend Fn+F12
Low Battery*
Timer*
Timer*
Low Battery*

Hibernation Mode
0%

Power-off
* These options are set using the ThinkPad Features program.

100 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Power Management

Standby Mode
In standby mode, the hard disk drive stops and the LCD turns off.
All system tasks are interrupted when you enter standby mode. The
computer immediately resumes normal operation when you press
any key or use any pointing device. Also, if a power-saving monitor
(Energy Star Monitor) is in use when the computer enters standby
mode, the computer activates the monitor's low-power mode.

Suspend Modes
The computer provides the following two types of suspend modes for
you to save power:
Suspend mode
RediSafe suspend mode

The following indicator lamps (visible when the LCD is closed)

change status when using suspend mode:

Indicator Lamps
Current Status
Suspend Mode Power-On
In Suspend Mode Green Off
Entering or Resuming Blinking green Off
Suspend
Normal Operation Off Green

Suspend mode
In suspend mode, all tasks are stopped and stored in memory to
save power. When the computer resumes normal operation, the
tasks are automatically restored.
RediSafe suspend mode
In RediSafe suspend mode, all tasks are stopped, and memory
data and the status of the computer are stored on the hard disk
drive. This prevents accidental loss of data during suspend
mode. Resuming normal operation is faster in RediSafe suspend
mode than it is in Hibernation mode; the computer resumes
normal operation by pressing the Fn key in RediSafe suspend
mode.

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 101

Using Power Management

If all battery power is used and the computer turns off during
RediSafe suspend mode, install a fully charged battery pack or
connect the AC Adapter; then press the power switch to resume
operation. All tasks are restored. Create the hibernation file
before using this mode. (See “Creating the Hibernation File” on
page 105.)
To enter RediSafe suspend mode, do the following:
If you are using OS/2 or Windows:
1. Start the ThinkPad Features program; then go to the
ThinkPad view.

2. Click on the battery icon ( ); then click on the

suspend/hibernation/resume options icon ( ).

3. If a hibernation file has not been created, click on Enable
hibernation and create the file on the hard disk drive.
4. Click on the check box next to RediSafe suspend. (A mark
appears in the check box when RediSafe suspend is
selected.)
5. Click on the OK button.
If you are using DOS:
1. Type PS2 HFILE C at the command prompt; then press Enter
to create the hibernation file on drive C (type the drive letter
of your choice).
2. Type PS2 SA E at the command prompt; then press Enter to
enable suspend mode.

102 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Power Management

Considerations for Suspend Mode

Consider the following before using suspend mode.

The computer can enter suspend mode when used with the
following operating systems:
– DOS Version 7.0 or later
– OS/2 Warp Version 3 or later
– Microsoft Windows Version 3.11 with DOS Version 7.0 or
later
Important
When you use Windows Version 3.11, ensure that Advanced
Power Management (APM) is installed according to the
instructions in “Installing Microsoft Windows Version 3.11 or
Later” on page 198.

Approximately 1.5 hours are needed to recharge the battery in

suspend mode.
Attached devices, such as a printer or serial device, stop running
when the computer enters suspend mode. When you resume
normal operation, the output might differ from what you expect,
because the device might be reset or lose its configuration
settings.
Sometimes you might want to use the computer with the LCD
closed, for example, when an external display and keyboard are
used. In such a case, turn on the computer with the LCD closed
or set the computer to not enter suspend mode when the LCD is
closed using the ThinkPad Features program.
When a power-on password or hard disk password is set, you
need to enter your password to resume normal operation from
the ThinkPad Features timer or ring indicator. However, no
password prompt will be displayed; only a blank screen is
displayed.

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 103

Using Power Management

Standby mode: When the computer is powered with ac power and is using one
Page 101. of the following IBM PC Cards, it enters standby mode:
– IBM 3270 Emulation Credit Card Adapter
– IBM Token-Ring 16/4 Credit Card Adapter
– IBM Credit Card Adapter for Ethernet
– IBM 5250 Emulation Credit Card Adapter
When other PC Cards are used and the computer enters
suspend mode, all application programs stop. Communication
also stops for communication PC Cards not listed above. For
some PC Cards, power to the PC Cards might also turn off.
When the computer is powered with battery power, the computer
turns power off to the PC Card, and communication stops for
communication PC Cards, so the duration of suspend mode is
longer.
If communication for a PC Card is not reestablished after
resuming normal operation, remove and then reinstall the PC
Card before restarting the system or application program. For
other kinds of PC Cards, if the PC Card or computer does not
operate, restart the application or computer.
Note: When the computer is using one of the following IBM modem
You must set the Ring Indicator cards and detects an incoming call while in suspend mode, the
option in the ThinkPad Features computer automatically resumes normal operation:
program so the computer
automatically resumes normal – IBM PCMCIA Data/FAX Modem
operation. – IBM High Speed PCMCIA Data/FAX Modem
For OS/2 or Windows: – SRAM or ATA PC Card
1. Click on the battery icon – IBM Microelectronics 2.4/9.6 Data/FAX Modem
– IBM Microelectronics 14.4/14.4 Data/FAX Modem
( ) in the ThinkPad – IBM Wireless Modem for ARDIS
view. – IBM Wireless Modem for Mobitex
2. Click on the – IBM Wireless Modem for Cellular/CDPD
suspend/hibernation/resume
While a communication link is active, the computer does not
enter suspend mode.
option icon ( ); then
select the ring indicator
option.
For DOS: Enter PS2 RI E

104 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Power Management

Hibernation Mode
Notes: In hibernation mode, all tasks are stopped and memory data and the
1. Before using hibernation mode, current status of the computer are stored on the hard disk drive;
you must create a hibernation then power is turned off. No battery power is used. When power is
file. turned on again, the computer automatically restores the tasks and
2. Using an expansion unit or a resumes normal operation. When the computer enters hibernation
particular PC Card can disable mode, you hear one short beep. A graphical message appears and
the hibernation mode. the suspend mode indicator lamp blinks; then a short beep sounds
again to inform you that the computer has entered hibernation mode.
3. With a base memory of 8MB, it
takes approximately 10 seconds
to enter hibernation mode and 18
seconds to resume normal
operation. (The time to enter or
exit hibernation mode depends
on the computer memory size.)

Creating the Hibernation File

Warning: When installing an operating system or installing additional computer

The hibernation file must not be memory, you must create a hibernation file on the hard disk drive to
created in a compressed data area use the hibernation mode. (You only need to create the hibernation
of the hard disk. file once after installing an operating system or additional memory.)

The size of the hibernation file will be greater than total memory.
For example, if base memory is 8MB and you have installed an
optional 4MB memory module (DIMM), the hibernation file is 13MB:
(8MB + 4MB) + 1MB = 13MB

The following describes how to create a hibernation file for your

operating system.

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 105

Using Power Management

If you are using OS/2 or Windows:

OS/2
WIN
1 Turn on the computer and start the ThinkPad Features
program.

2 Go to the ThinkPad view; the click on the battery icon.

3 Click on the suspend/hibernation/resume options icon.

4 Click on the Enable Hibernation button in the menu.

5 Make sure the hard disk drive in the computer is

selected; then press the OK button to create the
hibernation file.

The computer can now enter hibernation mode.

If you are using DOS:

DOS

Type PS2 HFILE C at the command prompt; then press Enter.

The hibernation file is created on drive C.

106 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Power Management

Considerations for Hibernation Mode

Consider the following before using hibernation mode:

Do not run any tasks while the hibernation file is being created.
Create the hibernation file only on the hard disk drive installed in
the computer. The hibernation file is hidden and cannot be
accessed.
The computer uses battery power to enter hibernation mode.
Therefore, it reserves some battery power when it is set to enter
hibernation mode when a low-battery condition occurs. This can
cause the battery operating time to be shorter than the time
shown on page 25.
Note: When the computer is powered with battery power, the computer
If the communication links are still turns power off to the PC Card when entering hibernation mode.
not reestablished, remove and then When resuming normal operation, if the PC Card or computer
reinstall the PC Card before
does not operate, restart the application or computer.
restarting the system or application
program. When the computer is powered with ac power and is using one
of the following IBM PC Cards, it does not enter hibernation
mode:
– IBM PCMCIA Data/FAX Modem
– IBM High Speed PCMCIA Data/FAX Modem
– IBM 3270 Emulation Credit Card Adapter
– IBM Token-Ring 16/4 Credit Card Adapter
– IBM Credit Card Adapter for Ethernet
– IBM 5250 Emulation Credit Card Adapter
– IBM Microelectronics 2.4/9.6 Data/FAX Modem
– IBM Microelectronics 14.4/14.4 Data/FAX Modem
– IBM Wireless Modem for ARDIS
– IBM Wireless Modem for Mobitex
– IBM Wireless Modem for Cellular/CDPD
This prevents possible problems from occurring with
communication application programs after the computer returns
to normal operation.

Chapter 4. Using Battery Power 107

Using Power Management

The figure below helps you determine how much power is normally
required for each computer feature, and how much is required when
the feature is controlled by the battery power-management function.

Legend:

Require Power in Saving Power

No Power-Saving Mode Amount of Required Power

LCD Off

Processor
Maximum Brightness at Minimum

Medium

Slow

Minimum
External Serial Off

Power-Saving Mode
Suspend Mode
Mwave DSP Off

Standby Mode Hard Disk Off Infrared Off

108 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer

This chapter provides information about how to protect your

computer and its internal devices.

Using Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Power-On Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Setting a Power-On Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Entering a Power-On Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Changing a Power-On Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Removing a Power-On Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Hard Disk Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Setting a Hard Disk Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Entering a Hard Disk Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Changing a Hard Disk Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Removing a Hard Disk Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Supervisor Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Setting a Supervisor Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Entering a Supervisor Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Changing a Supervisor Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Removing a Supervisor Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Using Several Hard Disk Drives with the Supervisor
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Using the Personalization Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Entering the Personal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Deleting a Personalized Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Using Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Using the Security Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Using the PC Card Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Removing the PC Card Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 109

Using Passwords

Using Passwords
There are three types of passwords you can use to protect your
computer and the removable hard disk drive:
The power-on password protects your computer from being used
by unauthorized persons.
The hard disk password protects the data on your removable
hard disk drive from being accessed by unauthorized persons.
The supervisor password protects the system information in
Easy-Setup from being modified and your removable hard disk
drive from being used by unauthorized persons.

Hints and Tips

You can display your personal information, such as your name or
address, on the password prompt screen. For details, see page
127.

Power-On Password
The power-on password helps protect your computer from being
used by unauthorized persons. If a power-on password is set, the
password prompt ( ) appears on the screen whenever you turn on
the computer and reminds you to enter the password.

Setting a Power-On Password

To set a power-on password:

Note:
If Initialize in the Config menu, 1 Start Easy-Setup and select the Password icon.
Password, or Start up cannot be To start Easy-Setup, press and hold F1 and turn on the
selected when using Easy-Setup, a
computer.
supervisor password is set. You
must enter the supervisor password
instead of the power-on password to
2 Select the Power-On icon ( ).
use all Easy-Setup functions.

110 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Passwords

Note:
When you type a wrong key, use the
3 Type your desired power-on password; then press
Backspace key to erase it and then Enter.
type the correct key. You can use any combination of up to 7 characters. Use a
combination of any letters or numbers (A to Z, 0 to 9) in
uppercase (A) or lowercase (a). Uppercase and lowercase
letters (for example, A and a) are treated the same.

4 Type your power-on password again to verify it; then

press Enter.

Do Not Forget Your Power-On Password!

If you forget your power-on password, you cannot reset it. You
have to take the computer to an IBM authorized reseller or IBM
marketing representative to have the password canceled. Proof
of purchase is required, and an additional charge might be
required for the service.

Once you set the password, you cannot change or remove it in

Easy-Setup; you must change or remove a password at the
password prompt screen that appears when you turn on the
computer. See “Changing a Power-On Password” on page 113 or
“Removing a Power-On Password” on page 114.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 111

Using Passwords

Entering a Power-On Password

Note: If a power-on password is set, the password prompt reminds you to
If the return to normal operation is enter the password when:
caused by a preset timer or an
incoming call through the modem, Turning on the computer.
the password prompt does not
Returning to normal operation from suspend mode.
appear. Type the correct password
on the blank screen.
When the password prompt appears at the top left corner on the
screen, do the following:

1 Type your power-on password.

Each time you press a key, the symbol appears.
When typing your password, release each key quickly. If
you hold a key down too long, the same letter can be
entered repeatedly.

2 Press the Enter key.

When the password is entered correctly, OK appears and
the computer starts normal operation.
When you enter the password incorrectly, X appears.
Enter the correct password.
If you fail to enter the correct password after three tries,
you must turn the computer off, wait at least 5 seconds,
and turn it on to try again.

112 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Passwords

Changing a Power-On Password

You must change your power-on password at the password prompt
screen that appears when you turn on the computer. You cannot
change it after normal operation is resumed. To change a power-on
password:

Important
Do not press Enter until you have finished all the steps to
change the power-on password.

1 Turn off the computer and wait at least 5 seconds; then

turn it on.

2 When the password prompt ( ) appears, type your

current power-on password; then press the Spacebar.

3 Type the new password; then press the Spacebar.

Use no more than 7 characters.

4 Type the new password again to verify it; then press

Enter.

All the steps can be summarized as follows:

Current(space)New(space)New(Enter)

The new password will be available when you turn on the computer
the next time.

Do Not Forget Your Power-On Password!

If you forget your power-on password, you cannot reset it. You
have to take the computer to an IBM authorized reseller or IBM
marketing representative to have the password canceled. Proof
of purchase is required, and an additional charge might be
required for the service.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 113

Using Passwords

Removing a Power-On Password

You must remove your power-on password at the password prompt
that appears when you turn on the computer. You cannot remove it
after normal operation is resumed. To remove a power-on
password:

1 Turn off the computer and wait at least 5 seconds; then

turn it on.

2 When the password prompt ( ) appears, type your

current password; then press the Spacebar.

3 Press Enter.
The power-on password is removed.

All the steps can be summarized as follows:

Current(space)(Enter)

114 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Passwords

Hard Disk Password

The hard disk password helps you protect the information stored on
your removable hard disk drive. Even if your hard disk was
removed from the computer, the information stored in your hard disk
cannot be accessed without the hard disk password.

Note: When you turn on the computer, the hard disk password prompt
The hard disk password is stored on appears on the screen and reminds you to enter your password.
the hard disk drive when you set the
hard disk password, while the When you use a secondary hard disk drive in the UltraBay, you can
power-on password is stored in the
set hard disk passwords for each of the hard disk drives installed.
nonvolatile memory of the computer. 1
The password prompt appears on the screen when you turn on
the computer and reminds you to enter the main hard disk
2
password; reminds you to enter the secondary hard disk
password.

When a hard disk password is set, a preset timer or an incoming call

do not activate the resume function.
Note: To use the resume function with a hard disk password, set the same
If the return to normal operation is password for both the power-on password and the hard disk
caused by a preset timer or an password.
incoming call through the modem,
the password prompt does not Note
appear. Type the correct password
on the blank screen. Using a Hard Disk Password with a Power-On Password:

You can use the hard disk password with the power-on password
at the same time. When you turn on the computer, the power-on
password prompt appears first and then the hard disk password
prompt appears on the screen. Enter the correct passwords.

When you set the same hard disk password as the power-on
password, only the power-on password prompt appears on the
screen. Enter the correct password. The hard disk password
screen does not appear.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 115

Using Passwords

Setting a Hard Disk Password

Note: To set a hard disk password:

If Initialize in the Config menu,
Password, or Start up functions
cannot be selected when using
1Start Easy-Setup; then select the Password icon.
Easy-Setup, the supervisor password To start Easy-Setup, press and hold F1 and turn on the
is set. You must enter the computer.
supervisor password instead of the
power-on password to use all
Easy-Setup functions.

Note:
HDD-1 represents a main hard disk
2 Select HDD-1 ( 1
) or HDD-2 ( 2
) according to the hard
password and HDD-2 represents a disk type you want to set.
secondary hard disk password.

Note:
When you type a wrong key, use the 3 Type your desired hard disk password; then press Enter.
Backspace key to erase it, and then You can use any combination of up to 7 characters. Use a
type the correct key.
combination of any letters or numbers (A to Z, 0 to 9) in
uppercase (A) or lowercase (a). Uppercase and lowercase
letters (for example, A and a) are treated the same.

4 Type your hard disk password again to verify it; then

press Enter.

Do Not Forget Your Hard Disk Password!

Note the password and keep it in a safe place.

If you forget your hard disk password, there is no way to reset

your password or recover data from the hard disk. Neither
an IBM authorized reseller nor IBM marketing representative can
make the hard disk drive usable.

Once you set the password, you cannot change or remove it in

Easy-Setup; you must change or remove a password at the
password prompt screen that appears when you turn on the
computer. See “Changing a Hard Disk Password” on page 118 or
“Removing a Hard Disk Password” on page 119.

116 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Passwords

Entering a Hard Disk Password

If a hard disk password is set, the hard disk password prompt

appears when:
You turn on the computer.
When the computer returns to normal operation from suspend or
hibernation mode.

When the password prompt appears at the top left corner on the
screen:
Note:
Do not press the Spacebar after you 1 Type the hard disk password.
enter the password; this action Each time you press a key, the symbol appears.
removes the password.
When typing your password, release each key quickly. If
you hold a key down too long, the same letter can be
entered repeatedly.

2 Press Enter.
When the password is entered correctly, OK appears and
the computer starts normal operation.
When you enter the password incorrectly, X appears.
Enter the correct password.
If you fail to enter the correct password after three tries,
you must turn the computer off, wait at least 5 seconds,
and turn it on to try again.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 117

Using Passwords

Changing a Hard Disk Password

The procedure to change a hard disk password depends on whether
or not it is set to the same password as the power-on password.

When the hard disk password is set the same as the power-on
password:

1 Remove the passwords by following the steps in

“Removing a Power-On Password” on page 114.
This operation removes both the hard disk password and the
power-on password.

2 In Easy-Setup, set a new hard disk password. See the

steps on page 116.

3 If you need a power-on password, set it in Easy-Setup.

When the hard disk password and the power-on password are
different, or the power-on password has not been set:

1 Turn off the computer and wait at least 5 seconds; then

turn it on.

2 If you have set a power-on password, type it; then press

Enter.

3 When the hard disk password prompt ( ) appears, type

your current hard disk password; then press the
Spacebar.

4 Type the new password; then press the Spacebar.

Use no more than 7 characters.

5 Type the new password again to verify it; then press

Enter.

All the steps can be summarized as follows:

Current(space)New(space)New(Enter)

118 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Passwords

Do Not Forget Your Hard Disk Password!

Note the password and keep it in a safe place.

If you forget your hard disk password, there is no way to reset

your password or recover data in the hard disk drive.
Neither an IBM authorized reseller nor IBM marketing
representative can make the hard disk drive usable.

Removing a Hard Disk Password

The procedure to remove a hard disk password depends on whether
or not it is set to the same password as the power-on password.

When the hard disk password is set the same as the power-on
password:

1 Remove the password by following the steps in

“Removing a Power-On Password” on page 114.
This operation removes both the hard disk password and the
power-on password.

2 If you need a power-on password, reset it in Easy-Setup.

When the hard disk password and the power-on password are
different, or a power-on password has not been set:

1 Turn off the computer and wait at least 5 seconds; then

turn it on.

2 If you have set the power-on password, type it; then

press Enter.

3 When the hard disk password prompt ( ) appears, type

your current password; then press the Spacebar.

4 Press Enter.
These steps can be summarized as follows:
Current(space)(Enter)

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 119

Using Passwords

Supervisor Password
The supervisor password helps you protect classified information. A
supervisor password:
Secures the system information stored in Easy-Setup.
Prohibits modification to the hardware.
Stops the computer after a POST error to restrict access to the
system information.
Note: Overrides the power-on password. (The supervisor password
The supervisor password has priority has priority over the power-on password.)
over the power-on password. You
can start the computer with the If a supervisor password is set, you are prompted with a power-on
supervisor password even if you do
icon ( ) to enter the supervisor password when entering the
not know the power-on password.
Easy-Setup program and when a POST error occurs. You can start
all normal operations for the computer except Easy-Setup without
the supervisor password.

Using Both Supervisor and Hard Disk Passwords

When a supervisor password is set, the same password is
automatically set for the hard disk password.

When you change or remove the supervisor password, the hard

disk password also is changed or removed.

120 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Passwords

Setting a Supervisor Password

To set a supervisor password:

1 Start Easy-Setup; then select the Password icon.

To start Easy-Setup, press and hold F1 and turn on the
computer.

2 Select the Supervisor icon ( ).

3 Type your desired supervisor password; then press

Enter.
You can use any combination of up to 7 characters. Use a
combination of any letters or numbers (A to Z, 0 to 9) in
uppercase (A) or lowercase (a). Uppercase and lowercase
letters (for example, A and a) are treated the same.

4 Type your supervisor password again to verify it; then

press Enter.

Do Not Forget Your Supervisor Password!

Note the password and keep it in a safe place.

If you forget your supervisor password, there is no way to reset

your password or recover data from the hard disk. You have
to take the computer to an IBM authorized reseller or IBM
marketing representative to have the system board replaced.
Proof of purchase is required, and an additional charge might be
required for the service. Neither an IBM authorized reseller nor
IBM marketing representative can make the hard disk drive
usable.

If you are using more than one hard disk drive, see page 125.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 121

Using Passwords

Entering a Supervisor Password

To set your supervisor password:

1 Type your supervisor password.

Each time you press a key, the symbol appears.
When typing your password, release each key quickly. If
you hold a key down too long, the same letter can be
entered repeatedly.

2 Press Enter.
When the password is entered correctly, OK appears.
When you enter the password incorrectly, X appears.
Enter the correct password.
If you fail to enter the correct password after three tries,
you must turn the computer off, wait at least 5 seconds,
and turn it on to try again.

Changing a Supervisor Password

To change your supervisor password:

1 Turn off the computer and wait at least 5 seconds; then

turn it on.

2 Start Easy-Setup.
To start Easy-Setup, press and hold F1 and turn on the
computer.

3 Type your current supervisor password at the power-on

prompt ( ); then press Enter.

4 Select the Password icon from the Easy-Setup menu.

5 Select the Supervisor icon; then type your current
supervisor password and press the Spacebar.
A window appears so you can enter a new password.

122 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Passwords

6 Type the new password; then press Enter.

7 Type the new password again for verification; then press
Enter.
Do Not Forget Your Supervisor Password!
Note the password and keep it in a safe place.

If you forget your supervisor password, you have to take the

computer to an IBM authorized reseller or IBM marketing
representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of
purchase is required, and an additional charge might be required
for the service.

If you forget your supervisor password, there is no way to reset

your password or recover data from the hard disk. Neither
an IBM authorized reseller nor IBM marketing representative can
make the hard disk drive usable.

If you are using more than one hard disk drive, see page 126.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 123

Using Passwords

Removing a Supervisor Password

To remove the supervisor password:

1 Turn off the computer and wait at least 5 seconds; then

turn it on.

2 Start Easy-Setup.
To start Easy-Setup, press and hold F1 and turn on the
computer.

3 When the power-on prompt ( ) appears, type your

current supervisor password; then press Enter.

4 Select the Password icon from the Easy-Setup menu.

5 Select the Supervisor icon; then type your current
password and press the Spacebar.

6 Press Enter at the blank box.

7 Press Enter again at the verification screen.
When the supervisor password is removed, the lock in the
Supervisor icon is unlocked ( ) and you can select the HDD-1 or
HDD-2 icon.

If you are using more than one hard disk drive, see page 126.

124 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Passwords

Using Several Hard Disk Drives with the Supervisor Password

Because the supervisor password automatically sets a hard disk
password, you must set a supervisor password for each hard disk
drive you are using.

To change or remove a supervisor password when you are using

several hard disk drives, you must change or remove the hard disk
password for each hard disk drive.

Setting a Supervisor Password when Using Several Hard Disk

Drives

To set a supervisor password when using more than one hard disk
drive on your computer:
To set a supervisor password:
Page 121.
1 Set a supervisor password on your computer.
To install the hard disk drive:
Page 149.
2 Install the hard disk drive in which you want to set the
supervisor password.

3 Turn on the computer. A 158 error appears.

4 Press Enter.
5 Type your supervisor password at the power-on
password prompt and start Easy-Setup.

6 Select the Password icon.

7 Select the Supervisor icon; then press Enter.
The supervisor password sets the hard disk password on the
hard disk drive.

8 Turn off the computer. Repeat steps 2 through 8 to set

the supervisor password for each hard disk drive.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 125

Using Passwords

Changing or Removing the Supervisor Password when Using

Several Hard Disk Drives

To change or remove the supervisor password when using more

than one hard disk drive on your computer:
To change the supervisor password:
Page 122.
1 Change or remove your supervisor password on your
computer.
To remove the supervisor password:
Page 124. 2 Install the hard disk drive with the old supervisor
password set.
To install the hard disk password:
Page 149. 3 Turn on the computer. The hard disk password prompt
appears.

4 Do one of the following:

If you removed the supervisor password in step 1, type the
old supervisor password; then press the Spacebar.
If you changed the supervisor password in step 1, change
the old password on the hard disk drive to the new
supervisor password by typing:
old(space)new(space)new

5 Press Enter.
6 Turn off the computer. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to
change or remove the supervisor password for each
hard disk drive.

126 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using the Personalization Feature

Using the Personalization Feature

You can display personal information, such as your name or
OS/2 WIN address, every time the computer is turned on and a power-on or
hard disk password is set. This can help you when you misplace
To set password:
your computer. Because the password is set, your data is secured
and cannot be accessed, but your personal information is displayed
Page 110.
and identifies the owner of the computer.

The personalization feature includes a personalization editor

program to create your own image to be displayed with the text
information you create, and a personalization update utility to store
your personal data in the nonvolatile memory of your system.
Note: A personalized password-prompt screen consists of two parts: the
For details about bitmap graphics, personal data area and the background bitmap area.
see page 297.
The personal data area 1 is the box in the center of the
screen that has a black-and-white bitmap.
The background bitmap area 2 surrounds the personal data
area.

d d d d
in kPa inkPa in kPa in kPa
Th Th Th Th
d d
in kPa John Smith
inkPa
Th
IBM Corporation
123-456-789
1234-56 Big Road, New York
Th

Pad d
If you find this computer,

kPa
please contact the above address.
k
Thin Th
in
d d d d
inkPa in kPa in kPa in kPa
Th Th Th Th

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 127

Using the Personalization Feature

Entering the Personal Information

To enter personal information for the password-prompt screen:

OS/2 WIN 1 Turn on the computer and start OS/2 or Windows.

2 Make a backup copy of Utility Diskette 2 using your
operating system's diskcopy command.

3 Insert the backup copy of the Utility Diskette 2 into the

diskette drive.

4 Start the ThinkPad Features program by double-clicking

the ThinkPad icon on the screen.

5 Click on the Personalization Editor ( XX XXXXX

X XX XXX ) icon.
The personalization editor window appears.
Personalization Editor
Personal Data Background Preview Help

k Pad k Pad k Pad k Pad

T hin T hin T hin T hin

kPad John Smith

k Pad
hin hin
IBM Corporation
T 123-456-789
1234-56 Big Road, New York T
If you find this computer,
d
kPa
please contact the above address.
kPad
in hin
Th T

k Pad k Pad k Pad k Pad

Thin Thin T hin Thin

6 Select Personal Data.

128 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using the Personalization Feature

Notes:
7 Fill in each field with your own information at the
Use the TAB key to move the Personal Data Entry window.
cursor to the next field.
You can change the color of the 8 Select OK.
text background from black to
white using the Black Next, create the background bitmap as follows:
background option.
9 Select Background in the Personalization Editor
window.
Windows Paintbrush automatically opens.
Note:
A sample bitmap file (BACKSAMP.BMP) 10 Draw an image or color the background.
is available on Utility Diskette 2. Your bitmap size must be 160 by 100 pels. To change the
size, select Options and then Image Attributes. Specify a
Width of 160, a Height of 100, and set the Units to pels.

11 Select File and Save As to save and name your drawing

as a 16-color bitmap file on the backup copy of Utility
Diskette 2.

12 Close Paintbrush.
13 When the opening file window appears, enter the name
of your bitmap file on Utility Diskette 2 that you have just
created.

14 Select Preview to preview the actual full-screen size of

the personal information screen.
To return to the previous screen, press Enter.
To save your personalized screen in the nonvolatile memory in the
computer:

15 Close all applications; then turn off the computer.

16 Insert the backup copy of the Utility Diskette 2 into the
diskette drive; then turn on the computer.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 129

Using the Personalization Feature

17 Select Update personalization data at the menu

screen; then follow the instructions on the screen.
Your data will be copied from Utility Diskette 2 and stored in
the nonvolatile memory in the computer.

18 After the data is stored, turn off the computer.

To set password:
Page 110.
19 Set your password if you have not set it.
You have created your own personalized password-prompt screen.
It will appear each time the computer is turned on.

Deleting a Personalized Screen

To delete a personalized screen from the password-prompt screen:

1 Close all applications; then turn off the computer.

2 Insert the backup copy of the Utility Diskette 2 into the
diskette drive; then turn on the computer.

3 Select Delete personalization data from the menu; then

follow the instructions on the screen.

4 After the data is updated, turn off the computer.

Your data has been deleted from the nonvolatile memory in
the computer.

130 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Locks

Using Locks
Note: You can protect your computer and its internal devices with locks.
You are responsible for evaluating,
selecting, and implementing the To protect the internal devices under the keyboard and prevent
locking devices and security features. the removal of your computer, you can purchase a Kensington
IBM makes no comments, lock or a compatible lock.
judgments, or warranties about the
To protect PC Cards, you can use a PC Card lock.
function, quality or performance of
locking devices and security features.

Using the Security Lock

To prevent your computer and its internal devices from being
removed without permission, purchase a Kensington lock or a
compatible lock and do the following:

1 Lock the latch 1 on the right side of the computer to

open the keyhole 2 .

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 131

Using Locks

2 Attach a Kensington lock or a compatible lock to the

keyhole on the side of the computer; then secure the
chain on the lock to a secure stationary object.

This also prevents the removal of:

Internal devices under the keyboard
Memory modules (DIMMs) in the memory slot on the bottom of
the computer.

132 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Locks

Using the PC Card Lock

To prevent PC Cards from being removed from the PCMCIA slots:

Warning:
Make sure that any locking device 1 Open the keyboard and remove the hard disk drive; then
is unlocked. position the PC Card lock as shown.
Warning:
The hard disk drive is a very
delicate device that needs careful
handling. If it falls onto a hard
surface, severe damage can occur.

2 Fit the upper portion of the PC Card lock into the two
notches 1 as shown.
1

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 133

Using Locks

3 Insert the lower portion of the PC Card lock into the

openings 2 on the bottom edge of the computer.

4 Slide the PC Card lock to the right.

5 Insert the spacer 3 from the inner side of the computer

as shown to stop the PC Card lock from sliding.
3

To use the security keyhole:

Page 131.
6 Replace the hard disk drive and lock the keyboard using
the security keyhole.

134 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using Locks

Removing the PC Card Lock

To remove the PC Card lock:

Warning:
Make sure that any locking device 1 Open the keyboard and remove the hard disk drive.
is unlocked.

Warning:
2 Remove the spacer from the computer.
The hard disk drive is a very
delicate device that needs careful 3 Slide the PC Card lock toward the front of the computer.
handling. If it falls onto a hard
surface, severe damage can occur. 4 Remove the PC Card lock first from the lower portion
and then from the upper portion.

Be sure to save the PC Card lock for future use.

Chapter 5. Protecting Your Computer 135

Using Locks

136 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options

This chapter provides information about how to install or remove

external or internal devices and IBM options.

Installing and Removing PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Inserting the PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Removing the PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Increasing Memory Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Installing and Removing the DIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Replacing the Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay . . . . . . . 152
Installing a Secondary Hard Disk Drive in the UltraBay . . . . . 156
Installing an Option in the UltraBay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Installing the DAA/Telephony Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Attaching an External Numeric Keypad or a Mouse . . . . . . . 167
Using the Mouse and Other Pointing Devices . . . . . . . . . 168
Attaching an External Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Attaching an External Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Changing the Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Setting the Monitor Type and the Display Driver . . . . . . . 172
Connecting an External Display to the Computer . . . . . . . 173
Changing the Screen Resolution or Color Depth . . . . . . . 173
Attaching an IBM Dock I or Dock II Expansion Unit . . . . . . . 175

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 137

Installing and Removing PC Cards

Installing and Removing PC Cards

This section explains how to install and remove a PC Card. For
information about operating the computer with PC Cards, refer to
“Using PC Cards” on page 53.

Note: The computer has two PCMCIA slots (upper slot 1 and lower slot
When installing an operating system, 2 ), and you can install two Type I or Type II PC Cards (one in
install the PCMCIA device driver that each slot), or a single Type III PC Card (in the lower slot).
is on the PCMCIA Device Driver
Diskette for DOS/Windows before
using PC Cards.

To install the PCMCIA device driver:

Page 179.

138 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing and Removing PC Cards

Inserting the PC Card

1 Find the notched edge 1 of the PC Card as shown.

2 Insert the PC Card into an appropriate slot according to

your PC Card type. Slot covers open to the inside when
you insert the PC Card.
If you are using a Type I or Type II PC Card, insert it into
either the upper slot 1 or the lower slot 2 .
If you are using a Type III PC Card, insert the card into the
lower slot 2 .

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 139

Installing and Removing PC Cards

3 Press the PC Card firmly into the connector until the

eject button 1 pops out. Then, pull the eject button out
slightly and fold it to the left.

You have completed the installation of the PC Card. Refer to the

following sections:
To use PC Cards, see “Using PC Cards” on page 53.
To use PC Cards with power-saving functions, see:
– “Considerations for Suspend Mode” on page 103.
– “Considerations for Hibernation Mode” on page 107.
To secure your PC Card with a lock, see “Using the PC Card
Lock” on page 133.

140 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing and Removing PC Cards

Removing the PC Card

Warning: Raise the PC Card eject button 1 for the PC Card you want
Make sure the PC Card lock is to remove. Then, press the PC Card eject button and remove
removed.
the PC Card.
To remove PC Card lock:
Page 134.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 141

Increasing Memory Capacity

Increasing Memory Capacity

Note: Increasing memory capacity is an effective way to make programs
IC DRAM cards cannot be used with run faster. You can increase the amount of memory in your
the 760C computer. computer by installing dual inline memory modules (DIMMs),
available as an option.

DIMM DIMM adapter

Three different capacities of DIMM (4MB, 8MB, and 16MB) are

available. To use a DIMM, you need to install it on the memory
module adapter (DIMM adapter) in the memory slot on the bottom of
the computer. The DIMM adapter has two sockets for DIMM
expansion. The memory capacity can be expanded up to 40MB
when you install two 16MB DIMMs in addition to the standard
memory (8MB).

Installing and Removing the DIMM

1 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC Adapter

and all cables from the computer.
Warning:
Make sure that any locking device 2 If you are using any locking device with a security
is unlocked. keyhole, remove it.

142 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Increasing Memory Capacity

3 Unlock the latch 1 on the right side of the computer.

4 Turn over the computer; then slide the memory slot

cover 1 and remove it.

Warning:
To avoid damaging the DIMM, do 5 Remove the DIMM adapter by lifting up the edge 1
not touch its contact edge. from the computer, and place it on a flat surface.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 143

Increasing Memory Capacity

6 Which are you going to do?

Install a DIMM Go to the next step.
Remove a DIMM Go to step 9 on page 145.

7 Insert the DIMM (available as an option) into either of

the sockets on the DIMM adapter.
a) Find the notch 1 on the side of the DIMM.
b) With the notched end of the DIMM toward the right side of
the socket 2 , insert the DIMM, at an angle of
approximately 20°, into the socket; then press it firmly.
c) Pivot the DIMM until it snaps into place.
If you have another DIMM to install, insert it into the other
socket in the same way.

2
1
Side View

2 1

20

144 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Increasing Memory Capacity

8 Go to step 10 on page 145.

Warning:
To avoid damaging the DIMM, do 9 Press out on the latches on both edges of the socket at
not touch its contact edge. the same time and remove the DIMM.

Be sure to save the DIMM for future use.

10 Attach the DIMM adapter to the computer.

a) Turn over the DIMM adapter.
b) Place it into the memory slot and then align the
connectors of the DIMM adapter 1 and the memory slot
2 .

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 145

Increasing Memory Capacity

c) Press on the shaded area 1 until the DIMM adapter

snaps into the memory slot connector.
Press on three points (both sides and center) of the
shaded area.

d) Make sure the DIMM adapter is firmly connected.

11 Align the matching ( ) marks on the memory slot cover

and the bottom of the computer; then slide in the
memory slot cover.
1

146 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Increasing Memory Capacity

12 To confirm that the DIMM adapter is correctly attached

to the computer, do the following:
a) Calculate your total memory size by adding the DIMM
memory size to the base memory size (7808KB).
For example, if you installed two 16MB DIMMs, the total
memory size can be calculated as follows:
16(MB) x 2 x 1 24(KB) + 78 8(KB) = 4 576(KB)
Note: b) Start Easy-Setup and confirm the memory size count at
To start Easy-Setup, press and hold the upper left corner of the screen as shown:
F1; then turn on the computer.

4 576 KB OK

If a 2 1 error code appears under the memory count, turn

off the computer and go to page 142 to reinstall the DIMM.

78 8 KB OK

2 1

c) Is the total memory size the same as the value you

calculated in step 12a?
Yes Go to the next step.
No Turn off the computer and go to page 142 to
reinstall the DIMM.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 147

Increasing Memory Capacity

Note: d) Select Test from the main menu of Easy-Setup; then

It may take some time to complete select Memory.
the memory test.
The memory test starts.
e) Does an OK message now appear under the Memory
icon?
Yes You have installed the DIMM and DIMM adapter
correctly. Exit Easy-Setup and go to next step.
No You need to reinstall the DIMM adapter. Go to
page 142 and reinstall the DIMM adapter.

13 Slide the latch 1 to lock the memory slot cover.

To prevent the installed DIMMs from being removed from the

computer, attach a lock to the security keyhole. See page
131.

14 Close the keyboard and reconnect all cables.

You have completed the installation or removal of the DIMM.
Note: If you plan to use hibernation mode, see “Creating the Hibernation
If you changed the memory installed File” on page 105.
in the computer, you need to create
a new hibernation file.

148 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive

Replacing the Hard Disk Drive

The capacity of the hard disk can be increased by replacing the
original hard disk drive with an optional one. This option can be
purchased through your IBM authorized reseller or IBM marketing
representative.

1 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC Adapter

and all cables from the computer.
Warning:
Make sure that any locking device 2 Open the LCD; then open the keyboard.
is unlocked.

Warning:
3 Remove the battery pack.
The hard disk drive is a very
delicate device that needs careful
handling. If it falls onto a hard
surface, severe damage can occur.
2
1

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 149

Replacing the Hard Disk Drive

4 Lift the hard disk drive handle by pulling the plastic tape
1 .

5 Remove the hard disk drive.

Be careful to hold the drive as it comes out of the bay. Gently
place it on a flat surface. After removing the drive, keep it in
the carrying case that contained the replacement drive.

150 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive

6 Insert the replacement drive. Press on the shaded area

1 as shown until the drive snaps into the connector
and then replace the hard disk drive handle.

7 Replace the battery pack and then close the keyboard.

8 Connect the AC Adapter to the computer; then turn on
the computer.

You have completed the replacement of the hard disk drive. To

install your operating system and other necessary software, see
“What You Need for Your Computer” on page 178.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 151

Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay

Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay

You can extend battery operation time by using two battery packs
installed in the computer at the same time. A secondary battery
pack is available as an option. Before installing a secondary battery
pack, remove the diskette drive from the UltraBay.
Warning:
To prevent damage to the diskette 1 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC Adapter
drive, make sure the AC Adapter and all cables from the computer.
is disconnected from the
computer. 2 Open the LCD; then open the keyboard.
The diskette drive is a very
delicate device that needs careful
3 Make sure that no diskette is in the drive.
handling. Do not press on, drop,
or apply any shock to the diskette 4 Lift the drive handle with the plastic tape, and remove
drive while it is removed from the the diskette drive.
computer.

152 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay

5 Pinch together both holes and remove the spacer by

lifting it up slightly.

6 Place the spacer to cover the diskette drive connector.

a) Make sure the projected end 1 fits into the opening 2 .

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 153

Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay

b) Place the spacer onto the connector and then open the
battery connector cover.

Note:
Keep the diskette drive bezel for 7 Slide the diskette drive bezel slightly to the left and
future use. remove it by pulling toward the front.

8 Place the blank bezel at the position 1 as shown and

slide it to the right.

154 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing a Secondary Battery Pack in the UltraBay

9 Insert the secondary battery pack into the UltraBay.

2

10 Close the keyboard and reconnect all cables.

You have completed the installation of the secondary battery pack.
To use the secondary battery pack, see page 88.

When Replacing the Diskette Drive

Before you replace the diskette drive in the UltraBay:
1. Cover the battery connector with its cover.
2. Move the spacer back to its original position (shown in step 5
on page 153).

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 155

Installing a Secondary Hard Disk Drive in the UltraBay

Installing a Secondary Hard Disk Drive in the UltraBay

You can use two hard disk drives at the same time by installing a
secondary hard disk in the UltraBay. To use the secondary hard
disk, you need to purchase another hard disk drive and a hard disk
holder. Before installing the secondary hard disk, remove the
diskette drive.

Warning:
The hard disk drive is a very 1 Attach the secondary hard disk drive to the hard disk
delicate device that needs careful holder.
handling. Do not press on, drop,
a) Insert the hard disk drive in the hard disk holder so that
or apply any shock to the hard
disk drive. the slot 1 on the hard disk drive fits into the projection
on the hard disk drive.
b) Press the shaded area 2 until the hard disk firmly snaps
into the hard disk holder; then replace the hard disk drive
handle 3 .

2 Close any running applications on the computer and

make sure that no diskette is in the drive.

156 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing a Secondary Hard Disk Drive in the UltraBay

Warning:
To prevent damage to the diskette
3 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC Adapter
drive, make sure the AC Adapter and all cables from the computer.
is disconnected from the
computer. 4 Open the LCD; then open the keyboard.
The diskette drive is a very
delicate device that needs careful 5 Remove the battery pack.
handling. Do not press on, drop,
or apply any shock to the diskette
drive while it is removed from the
computer.
2
1

6 Lift the drive handle with the plastic tape, and remove
the diskette drive.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 157

Installing a Secondary Hard Disk Drive in the UltraBay

Note:
You can see the lamp on the
7 Place the hard disk holder (with the hard disk drive
secondary hard disk, which turns on attached) into the UltraBay. Press on the shaded area
when data in the secondary hard 1 as shown until the drive snaps into the connector;
disk drive is accessed, through the then replace the drive handle 2 .
diskette drive bezel.

8 Replace the battery pack.

9 Close the keyboard; then reconnect all cables.
You have completed the installation of the secondary hard disk
drive.

158 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing an Option in the UltraBay

Installing an Option in the UltraBay

The diskette drive and the bezel (on the front of the computer) can
be removed to install options in its place. Some options may require
you to remove the option cover from the left side of the computer.
Warning:
To prevent damage to the diskette 1 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC Adapter
drive, make sure the AC Adapter and all cables from the computer.
is disconnected from the
computer. 2 Open the LCD; then open the keyboard.
The diskette drive is a very
delicate device that needs careful
3 Remove the battery pack.
handling. Do not press on, drop,
or apply any shock to the diskette
drive while it is removed from the
computer.
2
1

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 159

Installing an Option in the UltraBay

4 Make sure that no diskette is in the drive.

5 Lift the drive handle with the plastic tape, and remove
the diskette drive.

6 If the option you are installing has an option cover to be

attached at the left side of the computer, do the
following:
a) Push the option cover 1 from the inner side of the
computer to remove the option cover.

160 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing an Option in the UltraBay

b) Attach the new option cover that came with your option to
the side of the computer.

Note:
Keep the diskette drive bezel for 7 If the option you are installing has a front bezel, do the
future use. following:
a) Slide the diskette drive bezel slightly to the left and
remove it by pulling toward the front.

b) Place the new front bezel that came with your option
at the position 1 as shown and slide it to the right.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 161

Installing an Option in the UltraBay

8 Refer to the manual that came with the option to install

your option in the UltraBay.

9 Replace the battery pack.

10 Close the keyboard and reconnect all cables.
11 If the option in the UltraBay requires power, turn power
on in the ThinkPad Features program.

If you are using OS/2 or Windows:

OS/2 WIN
1 Start the ThinkPad Features program.
2 Click on the UltraBay icon ( ) in the ThinkPad view;
then set the power for the UltraBay.

If you are using DOS, type PS2 IDE2 E at the command prompt.

162 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing the DAA/Telephony Kit

Installing the DAA/Telephony Kit

Note: If the telephone connector on the left side of your computer is one
In some countries, the Mwave with a square receptacle, the computer can be used for telephony or
telephony functions are only modem/fax functions without any changes. However, if a blank port
available when the DAA/Telephony
cover and port cover are attached, you need to install the
Kit option is installed.
DAA/Telephony Kit option to use the Mwave telephony functions.
To attach the DAA/Telephony Kit:

1 Turn off the computer and open the keyboard.

2 Remove the metal port cover lock.

3 Remove the blank port cover on the left side of the

computer from the lower portion.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 163

Installing the DAA/Telephony Kit

Warning:
Make sure that any locking device
4 Install the plug with the round receptacle that came with
is unlocked. your option kit. Firmly press it into the connector.

5 On the left side of the computer, install the port cover

with the round opening that came with your option kit.

6 Install the metal port cover lock.

7 Close the keyboard.

164 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing the DAA/Telephony Kit

8 Connect the cables:

DANGER

To avoid shock hazard, do not connect the

telephone cable to or disconnect it from the
computer during electrical storms.

Note: a) Connect one end of the DAA interface cable 1 to the

Both ends of the DAA interface cable connector plug with the round receptacle.
are identical.
b) Connect the other end of the DAA interface cable 2 to
the round receptacle on the DAA.
c) Connect the ferrite-core end connector 3 of the
telephone cable to the square receptacle on the DAA.
d) Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the
telephone outlet 4 on the wall.

DAA

Telephone
Outlet

Core

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 165

Installing the DAA/Telephony Kit

After you have finished attaching the modem/fax port, install the
necessary software by referring to the manual that came with the
option kit.

Refer to “Using the Telephony Function” on page 78 for information

about how to use the Mwave telephony features.

166 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Attaching an External Numeric Keypad or a Mouse

Attaching an External Numeric Keypad or a Mouse

Warning: An external numeric keypad or a mouse can be attached directly to
When you connect a mouse other the connector on the right side of the computer. You can use both
than an IBM PS/2 Miniature Mouse, the IBM PS/2 Mouse and TrackPoint III as the pointing device.
turn off the computer.

Note: If you want to use the external numeric keypad and mouse at the
You can remove the keypad cover same time, first connect the keypad cable to the computer; then
1 and use it as a stand for the connect the mouse cable 1 to the connector at the rear of the
keypad.
keypad.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 167

Attaching an External Numeric Keypad or a Mouse

Using the Mouse and Other Pointing Devices

Note: A serial mouse connected to the serial port or a device that is not
The appropriate software must have compatible with the PS/2 Mouse can be connected to the external
be installed already. input-device connector. Some mouse types require the TrackPoint
III to be disabled before you can use them. To disable the
TrackPoint III:
With OS/2 or Windows:
OS/2 WIN
1 Start the ThinkPad Features program.
2 Select Setup.
3 Select Keyboard/Pointing Device.
4 Find the TrackPoint; then click on Disable to disable the
TrackPoint III.
These changes become effective when computer power is
turned off and then on again.

Using the IBM ThinkPad Space Saver Keyboard

When using the IBM ThinkPad Space Saver Keyboard, do not
install the device driver supplied with the Space Saver Keyboard.
When the Space Saver Keyboard is used, the device driver on
the computer's Utility Diskette automatically enables or disables
the TrackPoint III of the computer when power is turned on.

168 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Attaching an External Keyboard

Attaching an External Keyboard

You can connect an external keyboard to your computer through the
keyboard/mouse connector 1 (available separately as an option).

Note: The external keyboard must be connected through the

The computer enters suspend mode keyboard/mouse connector. It will not work if it is connected directly
when the LCD is closed. If you want to the computer.
to use the computer with the LCD
closed, set the suspend option in the
When the external keyboard is attached, the following keys are not
ThinkPad Features program so the
available:
computer does not enter suspend
mode when the LCD is closed. Numeric keypad on the system keyboard
External numeric keypad
ThinkPad Features program:
Page 38. When you attach the external keyboard, turn off the computer and
then attach the keyboard/mouse connector and the external
keyboard.

2
1

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 169

Attaching and Replacing an External Display

Attaching an External Display

Note: The LCD of the computer can display information in SVGA mode
When installing an operating system, (800-by-600 resolution) in 65 536 colors.
you must install the display driver
before you can use an external A maximum of 1024-by-768 resolution can be produced on any
display.
attached external display that supports the resolution mode.

To install the display driver:

Page 179.
Warning: To attach an external display:
When you select Both, do not
attach an external display that
supports only VGA mode
1 Change the display mode to CRT or Both.
(See “Changing the Display Mode” on page 171.)
(640-by-480 resolution).
Otherwise, the external display
screen will be scrambled and the 2 Set your monitor type and display device driver.
output will not be displayed, or the (See “Setting the Monitor Type and the Display Driver” on
screen might be damaged. page 172.)

3 Attach the external display to the computer.

(See “Connecting an External Display to the Computer” on
page 173.)

170 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Attaching and Replacing an External Display

Changing the Display Mode

You can display information on the LCD, the external display, or both
by using the following commands:

Using the Fn key function:

OS/2 DOS WIN
Press and hold the Fn key; then press the F7 key. The output
is displayed sequentially as follows:
External Both
Display

LCD
Entering a PS2 command from the command prompt:
– Type PS2 SC BOTH to display information on both the LCD
and external display.
– Type PS2 SC CRT to display information on the external
display.
– Type PS2 SC LCD to display information on the LCD.
Using the ThinkPad Features program:
OS/2 WIN
1. Start the ThinkPad Features program and select the Display
icon.
2. Select:
– Both to display information on both the LCD and
external display.
– CRT to display information on the external display.
– LCD to display information on the LCD.
3. Click on the OK button.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 171

Attaching and Replacing an External Display

Setting the Monitor Type and the Display Driver

Before attaching the external display to your computer, set the
appropriate monitor type and device driver type as follows:

OS/2 WIN 1 Start the ThinkPad Features program.

2 Select the Display icon.
3 Select the Monitor.
Note:
Refer to the specification of your 4 Select your display type from the Monitor Selection list,
external display about supported or click on the new resolution and VSYNC (refresh rate)
resolution and VSYNC. from the list.

5 Click on OK.
6 Select Device Driver.
7 Click on the new resolution and colors; then click on OK.
8 Restart OS/2 or Windows to make the changes effective.
Hints and Tips
When you are using OS/2 or Windows, the virtual screen function is
available with the ThinkPad Features program. It is used to display a
part of the high-resolution screen image that is produced by the
computer. Other parts can be seen by moving the screen with the
TrackPoint III or other pointing device.

172 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Attaching and Replacing an External Display

Connecting an External Display to the Computer

Warning: To attach an external display to the computer:
Do not disconnect the external
display while the computer is in
suspend mode or hibernation
1 Turn off the computer.
mode. If no external display is
attached when the computer
2 Attach the external display to the external display
resumes, the LCD will remain connector ( ) and to the electrical outlet.
blank and the output will not be
displayed. It does not depend on
the resolution value.
3 Turn on the external display and the computer.

Changing the Screen Resolution or Color Depth

To change the screen resolution or color depth of an external
display:

For OS/2 or Windows:

OS/2 WIN
1 Start the ThinkPad Features program.
2 Select the Display icon.
3 Select Device Driver.
4 Click on the new resolution and color depth; then click
on OK.

5 Restart OS/2 or Windows to make the changes effective.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 173

Attaching and Replacing an External Display

The computer supports the following color depth and resolution on

an attached SVGA display:

Color Resolution
640 by 480
256 colors 800 by 600
1024 by 768
640 by 480
65 536 colors
Note: 800 by 600
* To use 16 777 216 colors, set the
display mode to CRT only. 16 777 216 colors * 640 by 480

174 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Attaching an IBM Dock I or Dock II Expansion Unit

Attaching an IBM Dock I or Dock II Expansion Unit

Warning: To expand your computer, you can use an IBM ThinkPad Dock I or
Do not use the Utility Diskette that Dock II expansion unit. Either unit offers you a portable multimedia
came with the IBM Dock II. environment: CD-ROM drive bay, stereo speakers, and adapter slots
for various adapter cards.
Note: The illustration shows the computer attached to the Dock II.
Before you dock the IBM Dock I or
Dock II to the computer, see Dock I
User's Guide or Dock II User's
Guide.

Warning:
When setting up the Dock I or
Dock II, avoid any hardware
conflicts.

To avoid hardware conflicts:

Page 243.

Hints and Tips

When an IBM Dock I expansion unit is attached to the computer, you
can adjust the sound volume by using the following key combinations:

When you press and hold Fn and then press PgUp ( ), the
sound volume increases.

When you press and hold Fn and then press PgDn ( ), the
sound volume decreases.

Chapter 6. Installing and Removing Options 175

Attaching an IBM Dock I or Dock II Expansion Unit

176 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Chapter 7. Installing Software

This chapter provides information about the software installed in your

computer and the procedures for installing the necessary device
drivers when reinstalling an operating system.

What You Need for Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Installing the Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Installing Software for OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Installing IBM OS/2 Warp Version 3 or Later . . . . . . . . . 181
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for OS/2 . . . . . 184
Installing the PCMCIA Device Driver for OS/2 . . . . . . . . 185
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for OS/2 . . . . 186
Installing the Infrared Device Driver for OS/2 . . . . . . . . . 188
Installing the ThinkPad Display Device Driver for OS/2 . . . 190
Installing Software for DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Installing IBM PC DOS Version 7.0 or Later . . . . . . . . . . 191
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for DOS . . . . . 192
Installing the PCMCIA Device Driver for DOS . . . . . . . . . 193
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for DOS . . . . 195
Installing Software for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Installing Microsoft Windows Version 3.11 or Later . . . . . . 198
Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for Windows . . . 202
Installing the PCMCIA Features for Windows . . . . . . . . . 203
Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows . . 205
Installing the Infrared Device Driver for Windows . . . . . . . 207
Installing the ThinkPad Display Driver for Windows . . . . . 208

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 177

What You Need for Your Computer

What You Need for Your Computer

Your computer comes with the following software already installed:
Mwave Device Driver
IR Device Driver
PCMCIA device driver
PC Card Director program
ThinkPad Features program
ThinkPad display driver
Online book

When reinstalling an operating system, you must install an operating

system and the software listed above for your computer to operate
as it did at the time of purchase. The online book, however, is
available only at the time of purchase and no diskettes are available
for reinstallation.

The PC Card client device driver is not part of the preinstalled

software. Refer to the manual that came with the PC Card to install
the device driver.

178 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What You Need for Your Computer

Page numbers: The following shows you what must be installed for each operating
system before you can begin computer operation.
For OS/2:
1 Page 181. OS/2 Warp PC DOS Version 7.0 Microsoft Windows
2 Page 184. Version 3 or later or later Version 3.11 or later
3 Page 185. 11 InstallDOS
4 Page 186. 1 Install OS/2 7 InstallDOS
InstallThinkPad
5 Page 188. 12 Featuresfor DOS
6 Page 190.
InstallThinkPad InstallThinkPad
Features Features
For DOS: 2 Program
8 Program 13 InstallMicrosoft
Windows
7 Page 191.
8 Page 192. InstallwithAdvanced
PowerManagement
9 Page 193. InstallPCMCIA
1 Page 195. 3 InstallPCMCIA
devicedriver 9 devicedriver InstallThinkPad
displaydriver
For Windows: InstallThinkPad
11 Page 191. InstallMwave InstallMwave 14 Features
4 SupportSoftware 10 Support for Windows
12 Page 192. Software
13 Page 198.
14 Page 202.
15 Page 203. InstallInfrared 15 InstallPCMCIA
devicedriver
16 Page 205.
5 devicedriver
17 Page 207.
InstallMwave
16 Support
InstallThinkPad Software
6 displaydriver

17 InstallInfrared
devicedriver

StartComputerOperation

Chapter 7. Installing Software 179

Installing Software

Installing the Operating System

The operating systems supported by your computer are:
IBM Operating System/2 (OS/2) Warp Version 3 or later
IBM PC DOS Version 7.0 or later
Microsoft Windows 3.11 or later

Important
If you will be installing Windows 3.11 or later, you must first do
the following for Windows to operate correctly:
Install the ThinkPad display driver instead of the default
device drivers that came with Windows.
When the Windows Setup program asks you to select either
Express Setup or Custom Setup, select C for Custom
Setup.

Refer to the appropriate section to install your operating system and

its device drivers:
If you are installing OS/2: go to “Installing Software for OS/2”
on page 181.
If you are installing DOS: go to “Installing Software for DOS” on
page 191.
If you are installing Windows: go to “Installing Software for
Windows” on page 197.

180 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing IBM OS/2 Warp

OS/2 Installing Software for OS/2

This section describes the installation procedures for OS/2 Warp
Version 3 or later and its device drivers for your ThinkPad.

Your computer comes with the following software already installed at

the time of purchase. When reinstalling OS/2 Warp Version 3 or
later, install this software for your computer to work as it did:
OS/2 Warp Version 3 or later
ThinkPad Features program
PCMCIA device driver
Mwave DSP support software
Infrared device driver
ThinkPad display driver

Installing IBM OS/2 Warp Version 3 or Later

Your installation of OS/2 Warp will differ, depending on whether you
use the Dual Boot or the Boot Manager for switching between OS/2
Warp and DOS.

Which type are you going to use?

Dual Boot Go to “Installing OS/2 Warp with Dual Boot” on
page 182.
Boot Manager Go to “Installing OS/2 Warp with the Boot
Manager” on page 183.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 181

Installing IBM OS/2 Warp

Installing OS/2 Warp with Dual Boot

When you install OS/2 Warp with Dual Boot, do the following before
actually installing OS/2:
To install the DOS ThinkPad If DOS and Windows are not installed in the computer, install DOS
Features program: and Windows, and the ThinkPad Features program for both DOS
Page 192. and Windows.

To install the Windows ThinkPad Install OS/2 Warp by referring to the documentation.
Features program:
Page 202.
Note: Be sure to pay attention to the following during installation:
If you have the OS/2 Warp 3.0
FixPak WFP_ (XR0W005), install it Select VGA as the Primary Display in the System
after you complete the installation of Configuration screen.
OS/2 Warp. Follow the instructions
Do not select the PCMCIA Feature in the System
in the README.1ST file in diskette 1
Configuration screen. Leave it as No Support Installed.
of that FixPak.

If you want to continue to install all device drivers, continue with

“Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for OS/2” on page 184.

182 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing IBM OS/2 Warp

Installing OS/2 Warp with the Boot Manager

When you install OS/2 Warp with the Boot Manager:

1 Install the Boot Manager, referring to the OS/2 Warp

documentation.
To install the DOS ThinkPad
Features program: 2 Install DOS and Windows, and the ThinkPad Features
Page 192. programs for both DOS and Windows.
To install the Windows ThinkPad
Features program: 3 Install OS/2 Warp by referring to the documentation.
Page 202. Be sure to pay attention to the following during installation:
Select VGA as the Primary Display at the System
Note: Configuration screen.
If you have the OS/2 Warp 3.0
Do not select the PCMCIA Feature at the System
FixPak WFP_ (XR0W005), install it
after you complete the installation of
Configuration screen. Leave it as No Support Installed.
OS/2 Warp. Follow the instructions After OS/2 has been successfully installed, make sure you
in the README.1ST file in diskette 1 restart the computer.
of that FixPak.
If you want to continue to install all device drivers, continue with
“Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for OS/2” on page 184.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 183

Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for OS/2

Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for OS/2

Note: To install the ThinkPad Features program:
When installing an operating system,
you need to install the ThinkPad 1 Turn on the computer and start OS/2.
Features program.
2 Insert the Utility Diskette into the diskette drive.

3 Install the ThinkPad System Management device driver.

Note: a) Open the System Setup folder in the OS/2 System folder.
To open the OS/2 full screen:
b) Select Device Driver Install.
1. Select OS/2 System.
2. Select Command Prompts; then c) Click on the Install... button.
select OS/2 Full Screen.
d) Click on ThinkPad System Management Device Driver;
then click on OK.

4 Open the OS/2 full screen command prompt.

5 Go to the A: prompt and type INSTALL2; then press

Enter.
Note:
To open the DOS full screen: 6 Install the DOS ThinkPad Features program to use the
PS2 commands.
1. Select OS/2 System.
2. Select Command Prompts; then a) Exit the OS/2 full screen; then open the DOS full screen.
select DOS Full Screen.
b) Follow the instructions in “Installing the ThinkPad Features
Program for DOS” on page 192.

You have completed the installation of the ThinkPad Features

program.

If you want to continue to install all device drivers, continue with

“Installing the PCMCIA Device Driver for OS/2” on page 185.

184 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing PCMCIA Device Driver for OS/2

Installing the PCMCIA Device Driver for OS/2

When installing an operating system, you need to install the
following device drivers and software associated with PCMCIA
PC Card Director: before you can use the PC Cards:
Page 54.
Card Services device driver
Socket Services device driver
Resource Map Utility device driver
PC Card Power Management device driver
PC Card Director Utility
PC Card client device drivers (only when PC Card Director does
not support the PC Card)

To install the PCMCIA device driver:

1 Turn on the computer and start the operating system.

2 Insert the PC Card Director for OS/2 diskette into the

diskette drive.

3 Open the OS/2 full screen command prompt.

4 Type C:\>A:\PCMINST2 on the command line; then press

Enter.

5 Follow the instructions on the screen.

6 Click on OK when you have completed the installation.

7 After the installation is complete, close all applications,

remove the diskette from the diskette drive, and restart
the system.

Note: You have completed the installation of the PCMCIA device driver for
Whenever you update the OS/2.
CONFIG.SYS file, refer to “Adding to
the CONFIG.SYS File” on page 253. If you want to continue to install all device drivers, continue with
“Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for OS/2” on page 186.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 185

Installing Mwave DSP Support Software for OS/2

Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for OS/2

Note: If you have multiple operating systems, you might need to install
When installing an operating system, multiple versions of the Mwave DSP support software. For example,
you need to install the Mwave DSP to enable OS/2 and Windows applications for Mwave functions, two
support software.
separate Mwave DSP support software installations are required:
one for OS/2 and one for Windows.

The Mwave DSP support software is supplied in the Mwave DSP

Features Diskettes or in the hard disk drive of your computer.
If the Mwave DSP Features Diskettes were not supplied with
your computer, the support software is contained on the hard
disk drive. See the READ.ME file in the root directory of the
hard disk to install the Mwave DSP support software.
If the Mwave DSP Features Diskettes were supplied with your
computer, install the Mwave DSP support software as follows:

1 Turn on the computer; then start OS/2.

2 Open the OS/2 full screen command prompt.
3 Insert the Mwave DSP Features Diskette 1 for OS/2 into
the diskette drive.

4 Type A:SETUP; then press Enter.

The installation window appears on the screen.

5 Follow the instructions on the screen.

6 Restart OS/2 to make the Mwave features effective.
7 Install Mwave MMPM audio support software as follows:
a) Insert the Mwave DSP Features Diskette for OS/2 Audio
into the diskette drive.
b) Type A:SETUP at the command prompt; then press Enter.
c) Follow the instructions on the screen.

186 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing Mwave DSP Support Software for OS/2

8 After the installation is complete, remove any diskette

from the diskette drive; then restart OS/2 to activate the
Mwave DSP support software.

You have completed the installation of the Mwave DSP support

software for OS/2.

When You Use the WIN-OS/2 Environment

If you use the Mwave functions in WIN-OS/2:
1. Install the Mwave DSP support software for Windows in a full
screen WIN-OS/2 environment with the procedure on page
205.
2. Check your WIN-OS/2 Settings and modify them as follows,
referring to your OS/2 manuals:
WIN_RUN_MODE: 3.1 Enhanced Compatibility
HW_TIMER: ON
INT_DURING_IO: ON
DOS_BACKGROUND_EXECUTION: ON

You have completed the installation of the Mwave DSP support

software.

If you want to continue to install all device drivers, continue with

“Installing the Infrared Device Driver for OS/2” on page 188.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 187

Installing Infrared Device Driver for OS/2

Installing the Infrared Device Driver for OS/2

Note: To install the infrared device driver:
When installing an operating system,
you need to install the Infrared 1 Turn on the computer and start OS/2.
device driver.
2 If you have not installed DOS and WIN-OS2 support for
OS/2, install it by referring to your operating system
documents.

3 Go to the DOS command prompt.

4 Insert the Infrared Features diskette into the diskette

drive.

5 Type A:UINSTALL and press Enter.

The following screen appears:

6 Press Enter; then follow the instructions on the screen.

Select Install WIN-OS/2 ThinkPad Infrared Driver when you
are asked.

You have completed the installation of the Infrared device driver.

188 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing Infrared Device Driver for OS/2

Starting TranXit or Other Infrared Applications

If you are going to start TranXit or any other infrared applications
that use the ThinkPad infrared device driver from:
The Program Manager window, do the following:
1. Click on the Program Manager object in the Windows
Programs folder or the WIN-OS2 (full screen or window)
object in the Command Prompts folder with the right
mouse button.
2. Select Settings, Session, and then WIN-OS/2 Settings.
3. Modify the following setting as shown:
COM_DIRECT_ACCESS ON
A separate object that you have created for the infrared
application, do the following:
1. Click on the object with the right mouse button.
2. Select Settings, Session, and then check Separate
Session.
3. Select WIN-OS/2 Settings and modify the following
setting as shown:
COM_DIRECT_ACCESS ON

If you want to continue to install all device drivers, continue

installation with “Installing the ThinkPad Display Device Driver for
OS/2” on page 190.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 189

Installing ThinkPad Display Device Driver for OS/2

Installing the ThinkPad Display Device Driver for OS/2

Note: The display driver enables you to use screen resolutions from 640
When installing an operating system, by 480 to 1024 by 768 and colors from 256 to 16 million for the LCD
you need to install the ThinkPad and external display. (See page 173 for possible combinations of
display device driver.
resolution and color.) The display driver also takes advantage of the
computer's video capability.
ThinkPad Features: Before Installation
Page 38. Before you begin installing the display driver, set the display
device mode to LCD: select the Display icon and then LCD in
the ThinkPad Features program; or at the command prompt, type
PS2 SC LCD and press Enter.

To install the ThinkPad display device driver:

1 Start OS/2.

2 Insert the ThinkPad Video Features Diskette for OS/2 into

the diskette drive.

3 Open the OS/2 full screen or OS/2 window.

4 Go to the A: prompt; then type INSTALL and press Enter.

A:>INSTALL

5 Follow the instructions on the screen.

6 After the installation is complete, remove the diskette,

shut down OS/2, and restart the system.

You have completed the installation of the display driver for OS/2.

190 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing IBM PC DOS

DOS Installing Software for DOS

This section describes the installation procedures for DOS Version
7.0 or later and its device drivers for your ThinkPad.

Your computer comes with the following software already installed at

the time of purchase. When reinstalling DOS Version 7.0 or later,
install this software for your computer to work as it did:
DOS Version 7.0 or later
ThinkPad Features program
PCMCIA device driver
Mwave support software

Installing IBM PC DOS Version 7.0 or Later

Follow the instructions in the operating-system documentation. If you
also are installing Microsoft Windows 3.11 or later, go to “Installing
Microsoft Windows Version 3.11 or Later” on page 198. Otherwise,
if you want to continue to install all device drivers, continue with the
ThinkPad Features program.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 191

Installing ThinkPad Features Program for DOS

Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for DOS

Note: Do the following to install the ThinkPad Features program:
When installing an operating system,
you need to install the ThinkPad 1Turn on the computer.
Features program.

2 Insert the Utility Diskette into the diskette drive; then type
A:UINSTALL at the DOS prompt and press Enter.
The following screen appears:

3 Press Enter.

4 Select Install DOS ThinkPad Features and Fuel-Gauge

Program from the Installation Options menu; then follow
the instructions on the screen.

You have completed the installation of the ThinkPad Features

program.

If you want to continue to install all device drivers, continue with the
PCMCIA device driver.

192 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing PCMCIA Device Driver for DOS

Installing the PCMCIA Device Driver for DOS

Note: When installing an operating system, you need to install the
Do not install Phoenix** PCMCIA following device drivers and software associated with PCMCIA
support in IBM PC DOS 7.0. before you can use the PC Cards:
Card Services device driver
PC Card Director:
Socket Services device driver
Page 54.
Resource Map Utility device driver
PC Card Power Management device driver
PC Card Director Utility
PC Card client device drivers (only when PC Card Director does
not support the PC Card)

To install the PCMCIA device driver:

1 Turn on the computer and start the operating system;

then insert the PC Card Director for DOS/Windows
diskette into the diskette drive.

2 Type C:\>A:; then press Enter to go to the A: prompt.

3 Type A:\>PCMCINSTD; then press Enter.

The following screen appears:

Installation Options

Type the SOURCE drive letter (A-Z). When you install a program, the SOURCE
drive letter is the location you are installing FROM.

Source Drive ...[A]

Enter F1=Help F3=Exit

Chapter 7. Installing Software 193

Installing PCMCIA Device Driver for DOS

4 Press Enter.

5 Press Enter again when the confirmation message

appears.
The Installation Options menu appears.

6 Follow the instructions on the screen.

Note:
Whenever you update the 7 After the installation is complete, close all applications
CONFIG.SYS file, see page 253. and remove the diskette from the diskette drive.

You have completed the installation of the PCMCIA device driver for
DOS.

If you want to continue to install all device drivers, continue with the
Mwave DSP support software.

194 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing Mwave DSP Support Software for DOS

Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for DOS

Note: If you have multiple operating systems, you might need to install the
When installing an operating system, Mwave DSP support software for each operating system. For
you need to install the Mwave DSP example, to enable DOS and Windows applications for Mwave
support software.
functions, two separate Mwave DSP support software installations
are required: one for DOS and one for Windows.

The Mwave DSP support software is supplied in the Mwave DSP

Features Diskettes or on the hard disk drive of your computer.
If the Mwave DSP Features Diskettes were not supplied with
your computer, the support software is contained on the hard
disk drive. See the READ.ME file in the root directory of the
hard disk to install the Mwave DSP support software.
If the Mwave DSP Features Diskettes were supplied with your
computer, install the Mwave DSP support software as follows:

1 Turn on the computer.

2 Insert the Mwave DSP Features Diskette 1 for DOS into
the diskette drive.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 195

Installing Mwave DSP Support Software for DOS

3 At the command prompt, type A:INSTALL; then press

Enter.
The following screen, which enables you to specify the
directory location of Mwave DSP support software, appears:

Please specify the directory for the

installation of Mwave products.

Destination Path
c:\MWD

OK Cancel

4 If this directory is acceptable, press Enter. Otherwise,

type the directory name; then press Enter.

5 Follow the instructions on the screen.

6 After the installation is complete, remove any diskette
from the diskette drive; then restart DOS to activate the
Mwave DSP support software.

You have completed the installation of the Mwave DSP support

software for DOS.

196 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing Windows Software

WIN
Installing Software for Windows
This section describes the installation procedures for Windows
Version 3.11 or later and its device drivers for your ThinkPad.

Your computer comes with the following software already installed at

the time of purchase. When reinstalling Windows Version 3.11 or
later, install this software for your computer to work as it did:
DOS Version 7.0 or later
ThinkPad Features program for DOS
Windows Version 3.11 or later
ThinkPad display driver
ThinkPad Features program
PCMCIA device driver
Mwave support software
Infrared device driver

Important
If you will be installing Windows 3.11 or later, you must first do
the following for Windows to operate correctly:
When the Windows Setup program asks you to select either
Express Setup or Custom Setup, select C for Custom
Setup.
Install the ThinkPad display driver instead of the default
device drivers that came with Windows.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 197

Installing Microsoft Windows

Installing Microsoft Windows Version 3.11 or Later

Windows operates in a DOS environment. Install the following
before installing Windows:
DOS Version 7.0 or later (see your DOS manuals)
ThinkPad Features for DOS (see page 192)

Important
Before you install Windows Version 3.11 or later, you must do
the following for Windows to operate correctly:
When the Windows Setup program asks you to select either
Express Setup or Custom Setup, select C for Custom
Setup.
Install the ThinkPad display driver instead of the default
device drivers that came with Windows.

Do the following to install Windows Version 3.11 or later with

Advanced Power Management (APM) and the ThinkPad display
driver.

1 Turn on the computer.

2 Install Windows Version 3.11 or later with the APM

option:
Important
When the Windows Setup program asks you to select
Express Setup or Custom Setup, type C for Custom
Setup.

a) Start the installation as specified in the Windows manual.

198 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing Microsoft Windows

Note: b) When the Windows Setup program asks you to select

If you have installed OS/2, the path Express Setup or Custom Setup, type C for Custom
to install Windows may have Setup.
changed to C:\OS2\MDOS\WINOS2
(C is the drive on which you installed c) Continue installing Windows Version 3.11 until the
OS/2). If so, change the path to: following screen appears.
C:\WINDOWS

Windows Setup
===============

Setup has determined that your system includes the following hardware
and software components. If your computer or network appears on the
Hardware Compatibility List with an asterisk, press F1 for Help.

Computer: MS-DOS System

Display: VGA
Mouse: Microsoft, or IBM PS/2

d) Using the Up Arrow (↑ ), highlight MS-DOS System and

press Enter.
e) Using the Down Arrow (↓ ), highlight MS-DOS System
with APM and press Enter.
Verify that Computer has changed to MS-DOS System
with APM as shown below. If the item has not changed,
return to step 2d.

Windows Setup
===============

Setup has determined that your system includes the following hardware
and software components. If your computer or network appears on the
Hardware Compatibility List with an asterisk, press F1 for Help.

Computer: MS-DOS System with APM

Display: VGA
Mouse: Microsoft, or IBM PS/2

Chapter 7. Installing Software 199

Installing Microsoft Windows

3 When you have completed the installation of Windows

Version 3.11, edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT file so that the
computer will use the correct mouse driver.
When Windows Version 3.11 is installed, the computer is
automatically configured to use the MOUSE.COM driver
provided by Windows Version 3.11. However, for correct
operation, your computer must use the MOUSE.COM driver
that came with DOS.
a) At the DOS command prompt (usually C:\>), type
E\AUTOEXEC.BAT and press Enter.
b) Find the line: C:\WINDOWS\MOUSE.COM /Y
c) Change it to: C:\DOS\MOUSE.COM /Y
d) Save the file and restart the system.
Note:
You can change the display 4 Select your display resolution type:
resolution type by using the a) Using the Up Arrow (↑ ), highlight Display and press
ThinkPad Features program after Enter.
completing the installation.
b) Select Other (Requires disk...) from the menu.
c) Insert the Video Features Diskette for Windows 3.1 into
the diskette drive; then type A: and press Enter.
d) Select your desired resolution from the menu and press
Enter.
Verify that Display has changed to your desired resolution
type (an example is shown in the following screen). If the
item has not changed, return to step 4a.

200 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing Microsoft Windows

Windows Setup
===============

Setup has determined that your system includes the following hardware
and software components. If your computer or network appears on the
Hardware Compatibility List with an asterisk, press F1 for Help.

Computer: MS-DOS System with APM

Display: Cyber932 8 ×6 256 small font
Mouse: Microsoft, or IBM PS/2

e) Press Enter to continue the installation.

f) Restart the system.

When you start Windows from the DOS prompt, do not close the
LCD while the program is loading; if you do, the computer will stop
running.

If you want to continue to install all device drivers, continue with

“Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for Windows” on
page 202.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 201

Installing ThinkPad Features Program for Windows

Installing the ThinkPad Features Program for Windows

Note: If you are going to use Windows, install the ThinkPad Features
When installing an operating system, program for DOS first (see page 192); then do the following to install
you need to install the ThinkPad the ThinkPad Features program for Windows:
Features program.
1 Turn on the computer and start Windows.

2 Select File from the Program Manager window; then

select Run... from the pull-down menu.
P ro g ra m M anager

F ile O p tio n s W in d o w s H e lp

N e w...

O pen E n te r

M o v e ... F7

C o p y.. . F8

D e le te ... D el

P ro p e rtie s ... A lt+ E n te r

R u n ...

E x it W in d o w s ...

3 Insert the Utility Diskette into the diskette drive.

4 Type A:\INSTALLW and press Enter.

You have completed the installation of the ThinkPad Features

program.

If you want to continue to install all device drivers, continue with

“Installing the PCMCIA Features for Windows” on page 203.

202 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing PCMCIA Features for Windows

Installing the PCMCIA Features for Windows

Note: You must install the following device drivers and software associated
When installing an operating system, with PCMCIA before you can use the PC Cards:
you need to install the PCMCIA
device driver. Card Services device driver
Socket Services device driver
The PCMCIA device driver for
Windows must be installed with Resource Map Utility device driver
Windows 3.11 or a later version with PC Card Power Management device driver
enhanced mode. Otherwise, it PC Card Director Utility
cannot be installed. PC Card client device drivers (only when PC Card Director does
not support the PC Card)
PC Card Director:
To install the PCMCIA device driver:
Page 54.

1 Turn on the computer and start the operating system.

2 Select File from the Program Manager window; then

select Run... from the pull-down menu.
P ro g ra m M a n a g e r
F ile O p tio n s W in d o w s H e lp
N e w ...
O pen E n te r
M o v e ... F7
C o p y... F8
D e le te ... D el
P r o p e rtie s ... A lt+ E n te r
R u n ...
E x it W in d o w s ...

3 Insert the PC Card Director for DOS/Windows diskette

into the diskette drive.

4 Type A:PCMINSTW and press Enter.

When the dialog box for the installation program appears, click
on OK.

5 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the

installation.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 203

Installing PCMCIA Features for Windows

6 After the installation is complete, remove the diskette

from the diskette drive; then restart the computer.

You have completed the installation of the PCMCIA device driver for
Windows.

If you want to continue to install all device drivers, continue with

“Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows” on
page 205.

204 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows

Installing the Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows

Note: If you have multiple operating systems, you might need to install the
When installing an operating system, Mwave DSP support software for each operating system. For
you need to install the Mwave DSP example, to enable DOS and Windows applications for Mwave
support software.
functions, two separate Mwave DSP support software installations
are required: one for DOS and one for Windows.

The Mwave DSP support software is supplied in the Mwave DSP

Features Diskettes or on the hard disk drive of your computer.
If the Mwave DSP Features Diskettes were not supplied with
your computer, the support software is contained on the hard
disk drive. See the READ.ME file in the root directory of the
hard disk to install the Mwave DSP support software.
If the Mwave DSP Features Diskettes were supplied with your
computer, install the Mwave DSP support software and MIDI
sample files (if this is your first installation) as follows:
Warning:
Before you install the Mwave DSP 1 Turn on the computer; then start Windows.
support software, close all open
applications. 2 Select File from the Program Manager window; then
select Run... from the pull-down menu.

3 Insert the Mwave DSP Features Diskette 1 for Windows

into the diskette drive.

4 Type A:SETUP; then press Enter.

The following screen, which enables you to specify the
directory location of Mwave DSP support software, appears:
Mwave Installation
Please enter the desired location for the Mwave files.

c:\MWW

OK Cancel

Chapter 7. Installing Software 205

Installing Mwave DSP Support Software for Windows

5 If the directory is acceptable, press Enter. Otherwise,

type the directory name; then press Enter.

6 Follow the instructions on the screen.

7 After the installation is complete, remove any diskette
from the diskette drive; then restart Windows to activate
the Mwave DSP support software.
If this is your first time to install the Mwave DSP Support Software,
also install the MIDI sample files as follows:

8 Follow the same procedures from step 2 to step 7 on

page 206; however, this time use the Mwave DSP
Features Diskette 1 for MIDI (for Windows) instead of
the Mwave DSP Features Diskette 1 for Windows.

You have completed the installation of the Mwave DSP support

software for Windows.

If you want to continue to install all device drivers, continue with

“Installing the Infrared Device Driver for Windows” on page 207.

206 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Installing Infrared Device Driver for Windows

Installing the Infrared Device Driver for Windows

Note:
When installing an operating system, 1 Turn on the computer; then go to the DOS command
you need to install the Infrared prompt.
device driver.
2 Insert the Infrared Features diskette into the diskette
drive.

3 Type A:UINSTALL and press Enter.

The following screen appears:

4 Press Enter; then follow the instructions on the screen.

Select Install Windows ThinkPad Infrared Driver when you
are asked.

You have completed the installation of the Infrared device driver for
Windows.

Chapter 7. Installing Software 207

Installing ThinkPad Display Driver for Windows

Installing the ThinkPad Display Driver for Windows

If you did not install the display driver when Windows was installed
(by following the procedures on page 198), you must install the
ThinkPad display device driver. The display driver enables you to
use screen resolutions from 640 by 480 to 1024 by 768 and colors
from 256 to 16 million for the LCD and external display. (See page
173 for possible combinations of resolution and color.)

The display driver also takes advantage of the computer's video

capability.

Before installation
Before you begin installing the display driver, set the display
device mode to LCD: select the Display icon and then LCD in
the ThinkPad Features program; or at the command prompt, type
PS2 SC LCD and press Enter.

To install the ThinkPad device driver:

1 Turn on the computer.

Note:
To exit Windows: 2 If Windows is running on your computer, exit Windows
and switch to the DOS prompt.
1. Double-click the Control Menu
box in the upper left corner of the
Program Manager window. 3 Go to the Windows subdirectory and type SETUP; then
2. Click on the OK button to exit press Enter.
Windows.
4 Select Display from the Windows Setup menu; then
select Other (Requires disk...).

5 Insert the Video Features Diskette for Windows 3.1 into

the diskette drive; then type A:\ and press Enter.

6 Select your desired resolution from the menu and press

Enter. Follow the instructions on the screen.

You have completed the installation of the display driver for

Windows.

208 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems

Computer problems can be caused by software, hardware, or both.

You can diagnose and solve many problems with the assistance of
the self-tests and system programs contained in Easy-Setup. If a
hardware problem is detected by the self-tests, an error message is
displayed.

The system programs can identify a problem or provide information

for the service representative. Make a note of all error codes and
give them to the service representative when you call for service. If
the system programs cannot be loaded, the troubleshooting charts
and other information will help you determine what corrective action
to take.

Important

Use this chapter to test only IBM products. Non-IBM products

can cause misleading error information or incorrect computer
responses. When testing non-IBM products, refer to the
instructions supplied with those products.

Commonly Asked Questions and Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Common Problems and Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Frequently Asked Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Testing the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Troubleshooting Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
LCD Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Screen Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Other General Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
What If Testing Cannot Find the Problem? . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Battery Power Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Diskette Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
External Display Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Hibernation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Infrared Communication Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Keyboard, External Numeric Keypad, and Pointing Device
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Mwave DSP Feature Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 209

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Option Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

PC Card Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Software Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Getting Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Listing Installed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Recording Identification Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
The IBM HelpClub: Another Great Choice (in the U.S.A.) . . 238
Voice Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Online Housecall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
ThinkPad EasyServ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
International Warranty Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Electronic Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
The IBM HelpClub: Another Great Choice (for European
Countries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Yours for a free trial period: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Join the HelpClub! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

210 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Commonly Asked Questions and Problems

This section provides:
Common problems and their corresponding actions.
Frequently asked questions and their answers.
Common Problems and Actions

Problems Actions
My modem application does not Verify that:
work with the Mwave modem.
Your application is using COM2 as a communication port. COM2 is
assigned to the Mwave modem as a default.
Your application's modem type is set to one of the following:
– Mwave modem
– Generic Hayes-type modem
– Hayes SmartModem 2400
– Hayes modem
– Hayes-compatible modem
For more information:
– For OS/2 or Windows, double-click on the Read me icon.
– For DOS, see the README.TXT file in the MWD subdirectory.
My modem application does not If the PC Card Director shows the PC Card modem status “Ready,” add
work with the PC Card modem. the following option switch in the CONFIG.SYS file:
For DOS:
IBMDSS 1.SYS /IO =x (or /IO1=x)
For OS/2:
IBM2SS 1.SYS /IO =x (or /IO1=x)
Note: x shows the PCMCIA slot number (1, 2, or 12) on the
computer and “/IO1=” shows the slot number on a Dock I, Dock II, or
port replicator that is attached to the computer.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 211

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Problems Actions
My PC Card modem does not Your computer is equipped with a built-in Mwave modem. If you want to
work. use the PC Card modem instead of the Mwave modem, you need to
release a communications port (COM port) for the PC Card modem. Do
the following:
For OS/2 or Windows, start the ThinkPad Setup program and release
a COM port for your PC Card modem by:
– Disabling the InfraRed Device in the Infrared section.
– Disabling the Telephony Function in the DSP section.
– Changing the COM port for the Telephony Function from COM2
to COM1.
See page 38 to use the ThinkPad Setup program.
For DOS, use the PS2 command to disable the telephony function or
infrared port to release a COM port for the PC Card modem.
For more information or the latest tips, refer to:
– PC Card Problems on page 233
– READ.ME file and PCMCIA.CRD file in the THINKPAD
subdirectory of the computer
I cannot use PC Cards other than If you do not have the PC Card device driver for OS/2 but you have one
the IBM ones in the OS/2 Warp for DOS, your PC Card may run in the VDM (virtual DOS machine)
environment. environment. Refer to the “Virtual Card Services for OS/2” in the OS/2
Warp User's Guide for setting the VDM and the sample configuration files
on the PCMCIA Device Driver Diskette for OS/2. (If the PCMCIA Device
Driver Diskette for OS/2 did not come with the computer, create it using
the Diskette Factory program.)
My computer does not show as Performance varies depending on your hardware and software
good performance as I expected. configurations such as memory size, swapper file size, or smart drive
settings.
Error 2XX appears (memory error). Make sure your memory card is correctly installed.

212 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Problems Actions
A memory shortage or memory When you are using DOS, it is recommended that you use the DOS
error occurs. command MEM /C to review your DOS memory usage occasionally.
And then:
– Unload any unnecessary drivers from the CONFIG.SYS file. (For
example, unload printer drivers if you do not use a printer.)
– Reconfigure the UMB (upper memory block) using the DEVICEHIGH
statement.
– Use the multiple configuration setup for DOS (refer to the
documents supplied with DOS).
When you are using Windows:
– Try the same actions as described for DOS.
– Unload any unnecessary programs from the WIN.INI file (for
example, FUELWIN for AC operations, LRGPTR for large cursor,
and so on.)
The external display screen is Do the following:
blank.
Make sure the display mode parameter of the ThinkPad Features
program is set to CRT or Both.
In the ThinkPad Features program, set the computer not to enter
suspend mode when the LCD is closed.
The computer does not resume The computer automatically enters suspend or hibernation mode when the
from suspend mode, or the battery pack is empty. Do one of the following:
suspend lamp stays on and the
Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.
computer does not work.
Connect the AC Adapter to the computer.
The computer does not enter Verify that:
suspend or hibernation mode.
If the computer is attached to Dock I, suspend mode is disabled.
If the computer is attached to Dock II, open the Docking Control utility
and verify suspend and hibernation are not disabled. If either is
disabled, enable it.
If the AC Adapter is used and the computer is communicating,
suspend and hibernation modes are disabled. (See page 103.)
When using Windows, the cursor Make sure you have installed Windows with the APM option by following
does not move after normal the procedures on page 198.
operation is resumed from one of
the power-saving modes.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 213

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Frequently Asked Questions and Answers

Questions Answers
How can I expand my hard disk Most of the preloaded applications provide a way to delete and free hard
space? disk space. Check whether or not the application you want to delete has
its own delete icon.
How can I expand my memory? See answers to memory questions on page 213.
How can I get diskettes for You can create the operating systems diskettes or device driver diskettes
operating systems or device by using the Diskette Factory program or any other backup programs. If
drivers? you cannot use Diskette Factory program, do the following:
In the U.S., Access the IBM PC Company BBS (see “Electronic
Support Services” on page 238 to get a telephone number) to get the
latest versions of device drivers diskettes.
Purchase the operating systems diskettes or device drivers diskettes.
Contact your IBM dealer or IBM marketing representative. (See page
238 or page 240 for IBM HelpClub information.)
How can I resolve any resource See page 243 to get information about any hardware resources already
conflicts (for IRQ, COM port, and used by devices in the computer.
other settings) that have occurred
after installing a new option or a
new application?

214 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Testing the Computer

The following shows a basic way to test the computer:

1 Turn on the computer.

The power-on self-test (POST) runs automatically. If the test
ends without detecting an error, one of the following occurs:
The operating system or application screen appears.
A password prompt appears on the screen, if a password
has been set. Type the correct password and press Enter.
The Diskette and F1 prompts (shown below) appear.

F1

F2 F10

This means no operating system is installed in your

computer. Install it now.
Did one of these screens appear?
Yes Turn off the computer and continue with step 2.
No Go to page 217.

2 Press and hold F1; then turn on the computer to start

Easy-Setup. Hold F1 until the following Easy-Setup
menu appears.

Easy-Setup

Config Date/Time Password Start up Test

Restart

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 215

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

3 Did the Easy-Setup menu appear on the screen?

Yes The computer has successfully completed the POST
(internal tests), and the system programs have been
loaded. To start the test programs, select the Test
icon; then select the Start icon or press Enter.

Start Restart
1 1 1
SystemBoard Memory Display HDD-1 FDD-1 PCMCIA-1 Parallel

2
Serial DSP CD-ROM Infrared Audio HDD-2

3 2 2
HDD-3 FDD-2 PCMCIA-2

Exit

If the computer did not beep, the speaker is not

working correctly. Have the computer serviced. If
you are not sure about the beep, turn off the
computer; then turn it on again and repeat step 2
on page 215.
If you cannot go beyond the first screen, have the
computer serviced.
If an error is detected, the character X appears at
the left of the affected device, and an error code
appears below it. Record the error code and have
the computer serviced.
If the test does not find a problem but one still
exists, find the problem in the troubleshooting
charts on page 217.
No Return to step 2 on page 215 and start Easy-Setup
again. If you still cannot start Easy-Setup, find the
problem in the troubleshooting charts starting on
page 217.

216 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Troubleshooting Charts
In the charts, x can be any character.

Error Codes
Screen Message Action
I9990301 The computer cannot find the startup drive.
I9990302
1. Turn off the computer.
I9990305
2. Press and hold F1; then turn on the computer to start Easy-Setup. Hold F1
Note: Incorrect
until the Main Menu appears.
connection of the hard
disk drive can cause 3. Select the Start up icon. If you are unable to set the startup sequence,
these error codes to have the computer serviced.
appear. 4. Check the list of devices on the Set Startup Sequence screen. Is the
default drive in the startup sequence?
Yes Exit this screen, and turn off the computer.
No Select the Reset icon.
5. Is an operating system installed?
Yes Go to step 7.
No Install the operating system in your computer.
6. After the operating system is installed, turn off the computer.
7. Turn on the computer.
If the same screen message appears, have the computer serviced.
I99xxxxx Have the computer serviced.
111 If you are using a port replicator or an expansion unit, disconnect it; then
reconnect it.
If there is still a problem, have the computer serviced.
158 A hard disk drive without a hard disk password is installed when a supervisor
password is set.
1. Press Enter. The password menu in Easy-Setup appears.
2. Select the Supervisor icon.
3. Press Enter. The same password as the supervisor password is set for the
hard disk password on the hard disk drive.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 217

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Screen Message Action

159 The hard disk password differs from the supervisor password.
1. Turn off the computer; then turn it on again.
2. Change the hard disk password to the supervisor password at the hard disk
password prompt.
16x or 17x Follow the instructions on the screen.
174 There is a device configuration error.
Check that the hard disk drive and the diskette drive are installed firmly in the
connectors.
184 The entered password is invalid. Turn off the computer and wait at least 5
seconds; then turn it on again and type the correct password.
190 The computer has turned off because of a critical low-battery condition.
Connect the AC Adapter to the computer and charge the battery pack.
195 The system configuration before and after hibernation mode differs, and the
computer cannot resume normal operation.
Change the system configuration to what it was before the computer entered
hibernation mode.
If the memory size is changed, re-create the hibernation file (see page 105).
196 The computer cannot read the hibernation file.
Have the computer serviced.
2xx Verify that the DIMM option is correctly installed.

218 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Screen Message Action

30x Turn off the computer and all attached devices. Turn on the computer first; then
turn on the attached devices.
If the computer has an external keyboard connected, verify that:
1. The external keyboard is connected to the correct side of the
keyboard/mouse connector (see page 169).
2. The keyboard/mouse connector is correctly connected to the computer.
If the preceding items are correct, disconnect the keyboard/mouse connector
from the computer and verify that the operation of the system keyboard is
correct. If the system keyboard works correctly, have the keyboard/mouse
connector or the external keyboard serviced.
Test the computer by selecting the Start icon.
– If the computer stops during testing and does not continue, have the
computer serviced.
– If the tests do not find a problem but one still exists, find the problem in
“What If Testing Cannot Find the Problem?” on page 224.

LCD Problems
Problem Action
The screen is blank and Verify that:
there are no beeps.
The battery pack is correctly installed.
Note: If you are not sure
The AC Adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is
about the beeps, turn the
plugged into a working electrical outlet.
computer off; then turn it
on again, and listen to the The computer power switch is turned on.
beeps. If the preceding items are correct and the screen remains blank, have the
computer serviced.
The screen is blank and If a power-on password is set, type the correct password and press Enter (see
there is one beep. page 110).
Note: If you are using an If a power-on password is not set, verify that the brightness control on the
external display, go to computer is correctly adjusted. If the preceding items are correct and the
“External Display screen remains blank, have the computer serviced.
Problems” on page 226.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 219

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Problem Action
The screen is blank and Have the computer serviced.
there is a continuous
beep, or two or more
beeps.
Only the cursor appears. Have the computer serviced.
xxxxx KB OK appears Have the computer serviced.
and the computer halts.
The screen is unreadable Verify that the ThinkPad display driver was installed correctly.
or distorted.
Verify that Display in the Windows Setup screen is set to your display
resolution type (see page 198).
If these are correct, test the computer. If the test ends without an error, have
the computer serviced.
Incorrect characters Verify that operating systems and application programs have been installed and
appear on the screen. configured correctly.
If so, have the computer serviced.
The screen stays on Press the Power Shutdown switch on the rear of the computer with the tip of a
although the power switch pen to turn off the computer; then turn the computer on again.
is turned off.
The computer goes into Verify that:
suspend mode
The battery pack is charged.
immediately after the
POST. (The suspend Keyboard is firmly closed.
lamp turns on.) When the external display is attached to the computer, the Will not
suspend even if LCD is closed option (in the Suspend/Resume options of
the ThinkPad Features program) is enabled.
The environmental temperature is in an acceptable range. Refer to
“Specifications” on page 283.
If the preceding items are correct, have the computer serviced.
Error 190 appears and the The battery pack is low in power. Connect the AC Adapter to the computer, or
computer immediately replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.
turns off.
Missing, discolored, or The computer LCD contains more than 1 440 000 thin-film transistors (TFTs). A
bright dots appear on the small number of missing, discolored, or bright dots on the screen is an intrinsic
screen at all times. characteristic of TFT LCD technology and is not an LCD defect.

220 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Screen Messages
Message Action
Diskette and F1 prompts. Verify that hard disk drive is correctly installed. Or, verify that the self-starting
diskette is inserted correctly (with the label up and metal-shutter end first) in the
diskette drive.
If so, press F1. If both prompts remain, have the computer serviced.
F1

F2 F10

Error 163 appearing with Set the date and time by typing or clicking on the or to set the numbers;
the date and time screen. then click on the OK button.

1995 .12.31
Year Month Day

23:59:59
Hour Month Second

The date and time screen

appears when neither the
date nor the time is set in
the computer.
Power-on password A power-on or supervisor password was set. To use the computer, type the
prompt. correct password and press Enter (see page 110).
If the power-on-password is not accepted, a supervisor password might have
been set. Type the supervisor password and press Enter.
If there is still a problem, have the computer serviced.

Hard disk password A hard disk password was set. To use the computer, type the correct password
prompt. and press Enter (see page 110).
If there is still a problem, have the computer serviced.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 221

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Message Action
Test menu. Select the Start icon and follow the instructions to test your system.

Start Restart
If you cannot go beyond the first screen, have the computer serviced.
1 1 1

If the computer stops during testing and does not continue, have the
SystemBoard Memory Display HDD-1 FDD-1 PCMCIA-1 Parallel

3
Serial DSP CD-ROM Infrared Audio HDD-3

2 2 2
computer serviced.
HDD-2 FDD-2 PCMCIA-2

Exit
If testing does not find a problem but one still exists, find the problem in
“What If Testing Cannot Find the Problem?” on page 224.
POST error prompt. An error was found during the POST. Press Enter; then select Start from the
test menu to run the test.

ERROR If the test ends with an error, make a note of the error code and have the
computer serviced.
OK Cancel

Error prompt. Turn off the computer and start Easy-Setup; then select Test to test the
computer.
You can start the operating system by pressing F1 instead and ignore the error.

A screen or message that Turn off the computer and start Easy-Setup; then select Test to test the
is not listed. computer.
If you cannot start Easy-Setup, have the computer serviced.

Other General Problems

Problem Cause or Action
The computer enters The computer enters suspend mode automatically when the processor
suspend mode temperature is higher than a certain degree. This is not a defect.
automatically.
The computer Processor speed may decrease if the computer is used in a high-temperature
performance is getting environment. This is not a defect.
worse in an environment
where the temperature is
higher than the product
specifications. (See
“Specifications” on
page 283.)

222 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Problem Cause or Action

The computer has Have the computer serviced.
problems such as a
broken keylock or a
defective indicator lamp.
The computer does not If the suspend lamp is turned on, connect the AC Adapter or install a fully
turn off with the power charged battery pack in the computer; then resume operations.
switch.
If there is still a problem, press the Power Shutdown switch on the rear of the
computer with the tip of a pen to turn off the computer.
An application locks up or Press the Power Shutdown switch on the rear of the computer with the tip of a
the computer does not pen to turn off the computer; then turn the computer on again.
accept any input.
The computer does not Check that the startup sequence is set to start the computer from the diskette
start from a diskette. drive (see page 49).
Keyboard cannot be Check that a Kensington lock or compatible lock is not in use.
opened.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 223

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

What If Testing Cannot Find the Problem?

If the test programs do not find the problem, use these troubleshooting charts:

Battery Power Problems

Problem Action
The battery pack starts When the AC Adapter is connected and the remaining power in the installed
discharging automatically, battery pack is less than a certain amount, discharging and then charging of the
even if the AC Adapter is battery pack starts automatically.
connected.
When you are using OS/2 Discharge the battery pack; then recharge it (see page 95).
or Windows, the message,
“Please discharge battery”
appears on the screen.
The battery status The over-current protection device inside the battery pack has been activated.
indicator has turned off Wait for several hours and try to use it again. If there is still a problem, replace
although a battery pack is the battery pack or have the computer serviced.
installed in the computer.
The battery pack cannot The battery pack might be over-discharged.
be fully charged in 3
1. Turn off the computer.
hours by the power-off
2. Make sure that the over-discharged battery pack is in the computer.
charging method.
3. Connect the AC Adapter to the computer and let it charge.
If the battery pack cannot be fully charged in 24 hours, use the new battery
pack.
If a Quick Charger (available as an option) is available, use it to charge the
over-discharged battery pack.
The battery operating time Repeat discharging and charging of the battery pack at least three times.
indicated by the
Fuel-Gauge program or
the battery status indicator
is much longer or shorter
than actual operating time.
The operating time for a Repeat discharging and charging of the battery pack three to six times. If there
fully charged battery pack is still a problem, use a new battery pack.
becomes shorter.

224 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Problem Action
The computer does not The protective function in the battery pack might be activated. Turn off the
operate with a fully computer for 1 minute to reset the protective function, and then turn it back on
charged battery pack again.
installed.

Diskette Drive Problems

Problem Action
The diskette drive in use If there is a diskette in the drive, verify that:
icon stays on.
– There is nothing wrong with the diskette. Try a backup copy if you have
one.
– The diskette is inserted correctly (label up and metal-shutter end first) in
the diskette drive.
– The diskette contains the necessary files to start the system.
– There is nothing wrong with your application program (see page 235).
If the preceding items are correct, have the computer serviced.
If there is no diskette in the drive, have the computer serviced.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 225

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

External Display Problems

Problem Action
The screen is blank. Verify that:
The power cord for the external display is plugged into a working electrical
outlet and into the external display.
The external display is turned on and the brightness and contrast controls
are adjusted.
The signal cable for the external display is plugged into the external-display
connector on the computer. Some signal cables might not fit into the
external-display connector because of the connector type.
The external display (CRT) is selected as the display device using the Fn
key function (see page 51) or the ThinkPad Features program (see
page 38).
The suspend option to enter suspend mode when the LCD is closed is
disabled. (Click on the Battery icon in the ThinkPad Features program;
then follow the screen.)
Turn off the computer; then turn it on.
If the preceding items are correct and the screen of the external display remains
blank, run the display tests described in the instructions supplied with the
external display. If the tests show the external display is OK, have the computer
serviced.
The screen is unreadable Verify that:
or distorted.
The ThinkPad display driver is installed correctly (see page 179).
The Device Driver parameters in the Display setting screen are set to your
display resolution and color type (see page 172).
To change or set up the external display, see “Attaching an External Display” on
page 170.
If these are correct, run the tests described in the instructions supplied with the
external display. If the tests show the external display is OK, have the computer
serviced.
Wrong characters appear Verify that operating systems and application programs have been installed and
on the screen. configured correctly.
If so, have the computer serviced.

226 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Hibernation Problems
Problem Action
The computer does not Did you create the hibernation file?
enter hibernation mode
You must create the hibernation file before entering hibernation mode.
with the Fn+F12 key
combination. 1. Select the Power icon in the ThinkPad Features program.
2. Click on the More... button.
3. Click on the Enable Hibernation button.
Are you using PC Cards?
If you are using one of the IBM communication PC Cards listed on page
107, the computer cannot enter hibernation mode.
To enter hibernation mode, stop the communication program, and then
remove the PC Card or turn off the power to the PCMCIA slot using the PC
Card Director.

Infrared Communication Problems

Problem Action
The computer cannot Verify that:
communicate with other
Power is supplied to the infrared port by the ThinkPad Features program
devices using the infrared
(see page 38).
port on the computer.
The infrared function is enabled and other choices are set correctly in the
ThinkPad Setup menu in the ThinkPad Features program (see page 38).
The communicating device is using an equivalent communication speed.
The infrared ports are cleaned and do not have any spots.
No cable or electrical device is between the computer and the
communicating device.
The distance and angle between the computer and the communicating
device are correct.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 227

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Problem Action
Incorrect data is sent Verify that:
between the computer
The distance and angle between the devices are correct.
and device.
The communicating device is using an equivalent communication speed.
There is no device radiating infrared rays, such as remote-controlled devices
or wireless headphones, near the computer or device.
Direct sunlight or fluorescent lamps are not near the computer or device.

228 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Keyboard, External Numeric Keypad, and Pointing Device Problems

Problem Action
All or some keys on the If the problem occurs immediately after the computer returns to normal
system keyboard do not operation from suspend mode, enter the power-on password. If a power-on
work. password is set, you must enter the password.
If the external keyboard is connected, the numeric keypad on the system
keyboard will not work.
If the external numeric keypad or the mouse is connected:
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Remove the external numeric keypad or the mouse.
3. Turn on the computer and try using the keyboard again.
If the keyboard problem is resolved, check the connection of the external
numeric keypad, external keyboard, or the mouse. If there is still a problem,
have the computer serviced.
The pointer drifts when Drifting is a characteristic of the TrackPoint III and is not a defect. The drifting
the computer is turned on, occurs for several seconds under the following conditions:
or after resuming normal
When the computer is turned on.
operation.
When resuming normal operation.
—or—
When the TrackPoint III is pressed for a long period of time.
During computer
When the environmental temperature changes.
operation, the pointer
drifts when not using the Do not touch the TrackPoint III until the pointer stops moving.
TrackPoint III.
The mouse or pointing Verify that the mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected to the
device does not work. computer.
Try using the TrackPoint III. If the TrackPoint III works, suspect the
externally attached pointing device.
If you are using Windows, make sure Computer is set as MS-DOS System
with APM. See page 198.
If you are using a mouse that is not compatible with the IBM PS/2 Mouse,
disable the TrackPoint III using the ThinkPad Features program.
1. For OS/2 and Windows, see page 39. Select Setup,
Keyboard/Pointing Device; then click on Disable for the TrackPoint III.
2. For DOS, see page 42.
All or some keys on the Verify that the external numeric keypad is correctly connected to the computer.
external numeric keypad
do not work.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 229

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Problem Action
All or some keys on the Verify that:
external keyboard do not
The keyboard connector is connected to the correct side of the
work.
keyboard/mouse connector.
The keyboard/mouse connector is correctly connected to the computer.
If the preceding items are correct, disconnect the keyboard/mouse connector
from the computer and verify that the operation of the system keyboard is
correct. If the system keyboard works, have the keyboard/mouse connector or
the external keyboard serviced.
A number appears when The Numeric Lock function is on. Press and hold Shift; then press NumLk.
you type an alphabetic
character.

Mwave DSP Feature Problems

Problem Cause and action
Sound Blaster support This is probably because Mwave is being used for other functions, such as the
cannot be enabled. modem. Try disabling another function; then type MWGAMES ON MIN. The MIN
option enables Sound Blaster support using a minimum amount of Mwave
resources.
DOS games work slowly Some DOS games run slower in a Windows DOS session than in native DOS.
in a Windows session. Check the documentation of your game for special instructions about improving
performance. Configure your computer to use the VGA display driver rather
than a higher resolution or less efficient driver. Determine if your game allows
you to turn off “background music” and only play special effects.
A Windows error message This is often because the DSP resources have been used up. Close an
states that no MIDI device application that is using DSP, and retry the failing function.
is available.
A Windows error message This is often because the DSP resources have been used up. Close an
states that no WAV device application that is using DSP, and retry the failing function.
is available.

230 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Problem Cause and action

The modem does not Verify that:
work correctly.
The modem/fax port is securely installed.
The modem is correctly identified in your communication program.
This is often caused by a conflict between communication port addresses or
interrupt assignments, or both.
For more detail, see also modem problems on page 211.
A modem error occurred. Refer to the command reference in the Mwave ThinkPad window.
A modem application is Verify that:
not working.
You did not close the modem window instead of minimizing it.
The modem is set to support the speed you are trying to use.
A speaker phone Verify that you disabled the Audio button in the Audio Control.
application does not work.
The computer cannot Verify that the telephone plug is correctly attached (see page 163).
receive incoming calls
from the speaker phone or
the modem.
Other problems. The following is a list of failures that can cause other problems.
A compatibility problem exists between the Mwave feature and one or more
other adapters in the system.
To isolate a compatibility problem, remove other adapters from your system
and rerun the diagnostics while these adapters are removed.
The telephone cable configuration is not correct for your application.
The telephone cable is defective.
The telephone is defective.
The audio cable configuration is not correct for your application.
The audio cable is defective.
The audio equipment is defective.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 231

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Option Problems
Problem Action
An IBM option that was Verify that:
just installed does not
The option is designed for the computer.
work.
The option has been installed correctly by following the instructions supplied
with the option.
Other installed options or cables are not loose.
No I/O address or interrupt level conflict has occurred. Use the System
Info of the ThinkPad Features program.
If the test programs for the option did not find the problem, have the computer
and option serviced.
An IBM option that used Verify that:
to work no longer works.
All the option hardware and cable connections are securely connected.
If the option came with its own test instructions, use those instructions to
test the option.
If the preceding items are correct and the test programs did not find the
problem, have the computer and option serviced.
The serial port does not Ensure that Serial port is set to Serial_1, Serial_2, Serial_3, or Serial_4 in the
work. ThinkPad Features program.

232 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

PC Card Problems
Problem Action
Error messages appear Is the PCMCIA controller chip ready to be used?
when loading the Socket
Check if the PCMCIA device is ready by using Easy-Setup or the ThinkPad
Services or other PCMCIA
Features program.
device drivers.
PC Card Director does not 1. Are you using the EMS driver under DOS?
recognize your PC Card.
When using the EMS driver, you must set the correct value for the
/MA=mmmm-nnnn parameter in the Resource Map Utility. In the EMS
driver, check the UMB area used for PCMCIA under the X=mmmm-nnnn
parameter; then use that range to set the /MA parameter in the
Resource Map Utility.
2. Does your PC Card support PCMCIA Standard Release 2.0 or later?
If not, you cannot use PC Card Director.
3. Is your PC Card working?
If your PC Card has its own diagnostic instructions, use those
instructions to test it.
The PC Card is 1. Is the PC Card enabler installed?
recognized by PC Card
Refer to the manuals supplied with your PC Card.
Director, but does not
become “Ready.” 2. Are you using the EMS driver under DOS?
When using the EMS driver, you must set the correct value for the
/MA=mmmm-nnnn parameter in the Resource Map Utility. In the EMS
driver, check the UMB area used for PCMCIA under the X=mmmm-nnnn
parameter; then use that range to set the /MA parameter in the
Resource Map Utility. If you are using Windows, also set the value for
the EMMEXCLUDE= parameter in the SYSTEM.INI file.
3. Are the resources for the PC Card correctly reserved?
Refer to “Checking the Allocated Resources for the PC Card” on
page 263.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 233

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Problem Action
The PC Card is shown as 1. Make sure the resources reserved for the PC Card do not conflict with those
“Ready,” but does not for other system devices.
work correctly.
Refer to “Avoiding PC Card Resource Conflicts” on page 265.
2. Make sure the resources reserved for the PC Card match the settings in the
application program.
If you are using a modem card, check the COM number, I/O port
address, and IRQ level. If you are using a network card, check the I/O
port address, IRQ level, and memory window address. To check the
resources assigned to the PC Card, click on the Status button in the PC
Card Director program.
3. If you are using an I/O PC Card:
The PC Card might work if you add the following in the CONFIG.SYS
file:
IBMDSS 1.SYS /IO =x
Where x is a slot number.

Printer Problems
Problem Action
The printer does not work. Verify that:
The printer is turned on and ready to print.
The printer signal cable is connected to the correct connector on the
computer. (For the location of the printer connector, see “parallel connector”
on page 6.)
If the preceding items are correct and the printer still does not work, run the
tests described in the printer manual. If the tests show that the printer is OK,
have the computer serviced.

234 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Software Problems
Problem Action
An application program To determine if a problem is caused by the software, verify that:
does not work correctly.
Your computer has the minimum memory required to use the software.
Refer to the manuals supplied with the software to verify this.
The software is designed to operate with your computer.
Other software works correctly with your computer.
The software you are using works correctly with another computer.
If you have received any error messages when using the application program,
refer to the manuals supplied with the software for a description of the
messages and a solution to the problem.
If the preceding items are correct and there is still a problem, contact your IBM
authorized reseller or IBM marketing representative for help.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 235

What If Your Computer Does Not Work?

Getting Service
If you need further assistance, call your IBM authorized reseller or
IBM marketing representative.

When requesting service, describe the error message or problem to

the service representative. Error messages can help identify what
service action is required and help the service representative provide
quick and efficient service.

Important
During the warranty period, you may be responsible for repair
costs if the product damage was due to misuse, accident,
modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, or
improper maintenance by you.

For your convenience, write the service phone numbers here.

236 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Getting Service

Listing Installed Options

When requesting repair service, you might need to know which
options you have in your system. Check or write the names of your
options below.

DIMM Battery Pack

(4MB, 8MB, or 16MB)
______MB Hard Disk Drive Option in the UltraBay

Diskette Drive PC Cards

Recording Identification Numbers

The following information is needed when requesting repair services:

IBM Product Name ThinkPad 760C

Machine Type

Serial Number

The machine type and serial number 1 are located on the bottom
of the computer.
The machine type has a prefix of Type.
The serial number has a prefix of S/N.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 237

Getting Service

The IBM HelpClub: Another Great Choice (in the U.S.A.)

HelpWare Support Family offerings get you fast, accurate answers to
questions about your IBM ThinkPad. HelpWare also provides you
with access to a wide variety of other services to assist you in getting
the most out of your new computer.

Voice Technical Support

We will answer your hardware and preloaded operating system
questions regarding setup, usage, and problem determination. We
are here when you need us, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Online Housecall
An IBM technician can remotely access your ThinkPad, diagnose the
problem, and make the correction quickly and easily (modem
required).

ThinkPad EasyServ
A Federal Express courier will pick up your ThinkPad anywhere in
the U.S., deliver it to an IBM mobile repair facility, and return the
repaired machine to the location of your choice. In most cases we
will have it repaired and on its way back to you within only eight
hours of receipt. Courier charges in both directions are paid by IBM.
Ask about our overnight repair option!

International Warranty Service

Register your ThinkPad to receive warranty service worldwide,
whether you travel or relocate, wherever IBM or IBM resellers sell
and service your ThinkPad products. Call to receive your
International Warranty Service Certificate today.

Electronic Support Services

Online Services Check out our public messaging areas,
scheduled electronic conferences, and
searchable databases on Prodigy,
CompuServe, and America Online. You may
also find reference diskettes, software patches
and fixes, device drivers, and support
documentation on the Internet (site address is
ftp.pcco.ibm.com).

238 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Getting Service

IBM Bulletin Board Dial 1-919-517-0001 to download software

options catalogs, product reference guides,
shareware, and software device drivers.
IBM Automated Fax System
Product announcement letters, marketing
brochures, hardware and software tips, service
information, and more are available by fax.
Simply choose the automated fax system
option when you call.

HelpWare offers the following additional services both during and

after the warranty period.
Support Line
Enhanced PC Support
Network and Server Support
Personal Computer Software Assistance
Consult Line Consulting services from IBM experts
Custom Services
LAN Startup Services
Connectivity Services
Warranty and Repair Service
Product warranty and post-warranty
maintenance options available

Ordering Information
For additional HelpWare Support Family information or to purchase
any of the listed services, please call us at 1-800-772-2227. To
receive information by fax, just choose the automated fax system
option and request document #11175.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 239

Getting Service

The IBM HelpClub: Another Great Choice (for European

Countries)
Yours for a free trial period:

Helpware

What's great about the HelpClub† is that once you're a member you
get Helpware†. If you intend to use your new ThinkPad at home or
for business, Helpware provides a complete range of services
designed to help you get the most out of your new computer. If you
work for a large company, Helpware can complement your own PC
support service—for example, by providing help after your company
service has closed for the day.

When you register, Helpware offers you a full range of services,

including the following: Helpline: helpful advice, day or night
First and foremost, you've got access to Helpline — IBM's
customer-friendly, round-the-clock technical support and
troubleshooting service, available just by picking up the phone.
Complete peace of mind 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a
year.

Helpware Magazine: hints and tips for all

With your free membership in the HelpClub, you receive a free
subscription to Helpware magazine. We like to say it's one of the
best PC magazines around, and you don't have to take our word for
it. It has already won two publishing awards, and 8 out of 10
HelpClub members tell us it's the only PC magazine they need to
read. Helpware is attractively produced, packed with information,
and written in plain English, not technical gobbledegook.

HelpClub Privileges: lots of specials for members

HelpClub is an exclusive club for IBM users. You can become a
member for a free trial period to receive special offerings.

† The Helpware and the HelpClub free offers are subject to continued availability and may vary or may not be offered in all countries. Check with
your local IBM marketing representative for details.

240 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Getting Service

Helpware is also a source of special deals for IBM customers,

providing an exclusive collection of offers and discounts.

Join the HelpClub!

Call your country number below during office hours:
Austria 222 21145 7575
Belgium 02/542.5360
Denmark 45 93 45 45 lokal 4600
Finland 9800-6100
France 16-38 55 20 39
Germany 0231-9748-405
Italy 1678 36019
Luxembourg 02/542.5360
Netherlands 020 513 4700
Norway 66 99 95 95
Spain (91) 563 10 01
Sweden 020-55 55 55
Switzerland 155 46 46
United Kingdom 0628 895222

In other countries, contact your local IBM office for service

information.

Chapter 8. Solving Computer Problems 241

Getting Service

242 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Appendix A. Avoiding Hardware Conflicts

This appendix describes how to avoid system resource conflicts by

listing the default and optional hardware settings. It also describes
how to do a network remote program load and how to start the
computer from an ATA PC Card.

List of System Resources

When options such as the AT adapter or application programs are
installed, the system might not operate correctly because of
conflicting setting for IRQ (interrupt) levels, I/O addresses, DMA
channels, and memory addresses.

To avoid these conflicts, you must know the hardware requirements,

such as IRQ level and I/O addresses, for each option and program
as shown in their manuals. Then you must check the current
resource allocations for the computer and the Dock I or Dock II, and
select the available resource values by using the ThinkPad Features
program (see page 38).

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 243

Avoiding Hardware Conflicts

The following table summarizes the available system resources for the computer and the ThinkPad
Dock II. Values in parentheses are alternative values that are selectable in the ThinkPad Features
program or application programs.

Memory DMA
System Resources IRQ Address (Hex) I/O Address (Hex) Channel
Timer 0 none 0040–0043 none
Keyboard 1 none 0060, 0064 none
Serial Port disabled (or 3, 4) none 03F8–03FF (or 02F8–02FF) none
Parallel Port disabled (or 5, 7) none 03BC–03BE, 07BC–07BE (or 0, 1, 3,
0378–037F, 0778–077A, disabled
0278–027F, 0678–067A)
Infrared Port 4 (or 3, 5, 10, 11, none 01A0–01A7 (or 01B0–01B7, 0 and 3
15, disabled) 01C0–01C7, 01D0–01D7) or
02E8–02EF (or 03F8–03FF, disable
02F8–02FF, 03E8–03EF)
Diskette Controller 6 none 03F0–03F7 2
Video Controller none A0000–BFFFF 03B4–03B5, 03C0–03CF, none
03D4–03D5, 03D8–03D9,
43C6–43C9, 46E8
Mwave DSP 10 (or 5, 7, 11, none 4E30–4E3F, 0030–003F, 7 (or 0,
Device 15, disabled) 8E30–8E3F, CE30–CE3F 1, 6)
Sound Blaster 5 (or 7, 10, 11, none 0220–022F, 0240–024F 1 (or 0,
disabled) 6, 7)
Modem 3 (or 4, disabled) none 03F8–02F8, 03E8–02E8 none
Hard Disk Drive 14 none 01F0–01F7, 03F6–03F7 none
Hard Disk Drive in 15 none 0170–0177, 0376–0377 none
UltraBay
PCMCIA Controller none none 03E0–03E3 none
PC Card (Depends on the (Depends on the (Depends on the type of PC none
type of PC Card) type of PC Card) Card)
Real Time Clock 8 none 0070–0071 none
TrackPoint III or 12 none 0060, 0064 none
Mouse

244 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Avoiding Hardware Conflicts

Memory DMA
System Resources IRQ Address (Hex) I/O Address (Hex) Channel
Math Coprocessor 13 none none none
Exception
Options in Dock I or 9 (or 5, 7, 10, 11, DC000–DFFFF 340–35F none
Dock II 15)
SCSI Controller
AD/VC Adapter none none 92E9 none
Notes:
Selected values are assigned to a serial port and a parallel port of the computer.
Selectable in the ThinkPad Features program or PS2.EXE.
VL-Bus master is used.
Select an IRQ and the memory addresses with a jumper and switch on the system board of the Dock I or
Dock II. See “Using SCSI Controller and Support Software” in the Dock I User's Guide or Dock II User's
Guide. Do not select Disabled when OS/2 is used.

Appendix A. Avoiding Hardware Conflicts 245

Avoiding Hardware Conflicts

Avoiding System Resource Conflicts When Using PC Cards

When you do a network remote program load (RPL) or start the
computer from a PC Card, you must make sure that the system
resources used by the PC Card do not conflict with the resources
used by other devices.

Doing a Network Remote Program Load

To do a network remote program load (RPL):

1 Using the PS2 command or ThinkPad Features program,

check that there is no conflict between the system
resources used by the PC Card and by other devices.
The following are the system resources for a token-ring PC
Card and an Ethernet PC Card:
Token-Ring PC Card
IRQ 9
I/O Address (HEX) 0A20–0A23
Memory Address (HEX) CC000–CDFFF, D8000–DBFFF
Ethernet PC Card
IRQ 5
I/O Address (HEX) 0300–031F
Memory Address (HEX) D0000–D1FFF, D4000–D7FFF
IRQ5 is the default setting used by the SoundBlaster
emulation. To do an Ethernet PC Card RPL, change the
IRQ for the SoundBlaster emulation or disable it with the
ThinkPad Features program or the SB PS2 command (see
page 279).

2 Start Easy-Setup and select the Start Up icon.

246 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Avoiding Hardware Conflicts

3 Select the Network icon.

A window appears at the bottom of the screen for you to select
the RPL speed.

4 If you are using a token-ring card, select 4 (4Mbps) or 16

(16Mbps) for the RPL speed.
If you are using a network card other than a token-ring card,
you can select either RPL speed.

5 Click on OK or press Enter; then restart the computer.

Starting the Computer from an ATA PC Card

To start the computer from an ATA PC Card:

1 Using the PS2 command or ThinkPad Features program,

check that there is no conflict between the system
resources used by the PC Card and by other devices.
The following is the system resources for an ATA card:
IRQ 15
I/O Address (HEX) 0170–0177

2 Start Easy-Setup and select the Start Up icon.

3 Select the PCMCIA icon.

You cannot set the PC Card (PCMCIA icon) to follow the hard
disk drive of the computer (HDD-1 icon). If the HDD-1 icon is
already in the drive-startup sequence, click on the Reset icon;
then set the sequence.

4 Click on OK or press Enter; then restart the computer.

Appendix A. Avoiding Hardware Conflicts 247

Avoiding Hardware Conflicts

248 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards

This appendix describes the Auto Configurator program, which

automatically enables the PC Card without the device driver supplied
with your PC Card being installed. It also describes other
information related to using PC Cards.

Auto Configurator for PC Card Director

Note: The 760C computers provide the Auto Configurator, a program for
When installing an operating system, some PC Cards, so that you do not have to install the device driver
install the PCMCIA device driver that supplied with the card to use it.
is on the PC Card Director diskettes
to use the Auto Configurator.
The resource and configuration information for the PC Cards are
written in the script files. Once the information is written, you can
To install the PCMCIA device driver: use the Auto Configurator Utility to edit these script files.
Chapter 7.
When Auto Configurator is installed, the following line is added to
About script files: the CONFIG.SYS file according to your operating system:
Page 66.
For OS/2:
BASEDEV=AUTODRV2.SYS
For DOS and Windows:
DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] AUTODRV.SYS

OS/2
Starting the Auto Configurator Utility for OS/2
WIN
or Windows
This section describes the Auto Configurator Utility for OS/2 or
Windows.

To start Auto Configurator Utility for OS/2 or Windows, select the

Auto Configurator Utility icon from the PC Card Director window.

The operation for OS/2 and for Windows is the same.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 249

Advanced Information for PC Cards

Registering a PC Card in Auto Configurator

1 Select a card from the Available Cards list in the Auto
Configurator Utility main panel.

Select the card for which you want to assign the resources
first. For example, when you want to assign COM 3 to a
modem card, and not COM 2, select the setting for COM 3
first.

2 Click on the Add>> button.

3 Click on the Save button.

The names in the left list box (Available Cards) are the cards
that can be registered. The names in the right list box
(Selected Cards) are the cards that are already registered in
Auto Configurator. When a PC Card is installed, Auto
Configurator starts from the top of the list to assign the
resources to the card.

Deleting a Registered Card

1 Select the PC Card you want to delete from Selected
Cards in the Auto Configurator Utility main panel.

2 Click on the Delete button.

3 Click on the Save button.

250 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

Changing the Registered Order for PC Cards

To change the order of the registered PC Cards, do the following:

1 Click on the Order... button in the Auto Configurator

Utility main panel.

The operation for OS/2 and for Windows is the same.

2 Refer to the following to change the order of the PC

Cards in the list:
Moving a Card toward the Bottom
a) Select the PC Card you want to move.
b) Click on the Down button.
Every time you click on the Down button, the PC Card
is moved toward the bottom of the list.
Moving a Card toward the Top
a) Select the PC Card you want to move.
b) Click on the Up button.
Every time you click on the Up button, the PC Card is
moved toward the top of the list.

3 Click on the OK button to save the changes.

The changes are saved. To cancel the changes click on the
Cancel button.

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 251

Advanced Information for PC Cards

Changing the Resource Information for the PC Card

1 Select the PC Card you want to change from the left list
box in the Auto Configurator Utility main panel.

2 Click on the Edit... button.

The following screen is displayed:
Note: Auto Configurator Utility - Edit
The current resource information is Title Modem Card [2F8]
Card ID MODEM,MD24XC,116E2,118C2,FC2400,2460MC
set as the default and appears in the
input field of each item. The number I/O port 1
Description:
I/O Port 2
that can be set is displayed in the IRQ level Interrupt [IRQ] Level
pull-down list box. COM No.
Memory window 1
Base address
Size
Card offset
Memory window 2
Base address
Size
Card offset

Ok Cancel Help

3 You can change the following registered information for

the PC Card.
The items that can be changed differ among PC Cards.
Card ID
I/O port address
IRQ level
COM number of the serial port
Memory window address
Memory window size
Card offset address

4 Click on the OK button, and save the changes.

To cancel the changes, click on the Cancel button.

252 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

DOS
Starting the Auto Configurator Utility for DOS
To use the Auto Configurator Utility for DOS, do the following:
Note:
A script file contains the steps to 1 Create an AUTODRV.SCR file in DOS by gathering all
enable the PC Card and the the script files of the PC Cards you want to enable.
resource information for the I/O port,
For information on writing a script file, refer to AUTODRV.DOC
IRQ level, or memory address.
in the directory containing the script file.

2 Enter the following command at the DOS command

prompt:
>AUTOUTL /D
The utility (AUTOUTL.EXE), script file (AUTODRV.SCR), and
Auto Configurator itself (AUTODRV.SYS) must all be in the
same directory.

Adding to the CONFIG.SYS File

For PC Card Director to work correctly, the PC Card device drivers
(which make up the structured file of PC Card Director) must be
registered in the CONFIG.SYS file. These drivers are automatically
registered in the CONFIG.SYS file when you install PC Card Director
following the instructions in Chapter 7. The following shows each
driver registered in the CONFIG.SYS file and the standard rules.

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 253

Advanced Information for PC Cards

OS/2
Registered Drivers and Standard Rules for
OS/2
The following is a sample of the CONFIG.SYS file for OS/2:
:
BASEDEV=PCMCIA.SYS ← Card Services
BASEDEV=ICRMU 1.SYS ← Resource Map Utility
BASEDEV=IBM2SS 1.SYS ← Socket Services
BASEDEV=AUTODRV2.SYS ← Auto Configurator
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\VPCMCIA.SYS ← Virtual Card Services
:
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\xxxxxxx.SYS ← Storage card
device driver
:
REM PC_Card_Client_Device_Driver
:
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\$ICPMOS2.SYS ← Power
Management Support driver

Rule 1 Card Services, Resource Map Utility, and Socket Services

must be listed before any other PCMCIA drivers.
Rule 2 The Resource Map Utility is necessary only for OS/2
Version 2.1x.
Rule 3 The PCMCIA Power Management Support driver must be
listed after all drivers, at the end of the CONFIG.SYS file.
Rule 4 When using storage cards, the device drivers must be
installed according to the card type:

Using only an ATA card:

BASEDEV=PCM2ATA.ADD /!DM ← ATA card device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCMSSDIF.SYS ← Storage API
device driver
:
BASEDEV=OS2PCARD.DMD ← Storage Card Device Manager

254 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

Using an ATA card and an SRAM card:

BASEDEV=PCM2ATA.ADD /!DM ← ATA card device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCMSSDIF.SYS ← Storage API
device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCM2SRAM.SYS ← SRAM card
device driver
:
BASEDEV=OS2PCARD.DMD ← Storage Card Device Manager
Using an ATA card and a Flash card:
BASEDEV=PCM2ATA.ADD /!DM ← ATA card device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\FLSH2MTD.SYS ← Flash Card
Memory Technology driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCMSSDIF.SYS ← Storage API
device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCM2FLSH.SYS ← Flash card
device driver
:
BASEDEV=OS2PCARD.DMD ← Storage Card Device Manager
Using an ATA card, an SRAM card, and a Flash card:
BASEDEV=PCM2ATA.ADD /!DM ← ATA card device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\FLSH2MTD.SYS ← Flash Card
Memory Technology driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCMSSDIF.SYS ← Storage API
device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCM2SRAM.SYS ← SRAM card
device driver
DEVICE=C:\THINKPAD\PCM2FLSH.SYS ← Flash card
device driver
:
BASEDEV=OS2PCARD.DMD ← Storage Card Device Manager

Rule 5 The Storage Card Device Manager (OS2PCARD.DMD)

must be added after the Power Management Support
driver ($ICPMOS2.SYS) in the CONFIG.SYS file. If you
don't have the Power Management Support driver, the
Storage Card Device Manager must be added at the end
of the CONFIG.SYS file.

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 255

Advanced Information for PC Cards

DOS
Registered Drivers and Standard Rules for
WIN
DOS and Windows
The following is a sample of the CONFIG.SYS file for DOS and
Windows:

:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE FRAME=D X=C8 -CFFF
:
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\IBMDSS 1.SYS ← Socket Services
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\IBMDOSCS.SYS ← Card Services
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\IBMDSCSE.SYS ← Enhanced
Card Services
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\DICRMU 1.SYS /MA=C8 -CFFF
↑ Resource Map Utility
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\$ICPMDOS.SYS ← Power Management
Support driver
:
REM PC_Card_Client_Device_Driver
:
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\xxxxxxx.SYS ← Storage card
device driver
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\AUTODRV.SYS ← Auto Configurator
:
Rule 1 When using the PCMCIA drivers with the Software EMS
driver (EMM386.EXE), you must specify the X= parameter
for EMM386.EXE. This is to avoid conflict in the memory
area used by the PCMCIA drivers and the Software EMS
driver.
Rule 2 Socket Services, Card Services, and Resource Map Utility
must be listed in this order.
Rule 3 The Power Management Support driver must be listed
after the Resource Map Utility.
Rule 4 The PC Card Client device driver must be listed before
the Auto Configurator.
Rule 5 When using storage cards, you must install the device
driver according to the card type, as listed below.
Using only an ATA card:

256 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\PAWATA.SYS
Using an ATA card and an SRAM card:
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\PAWATAS.SYS
Using an ATA card, an SRAM card, and a Flash card:
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\FLSHDMTD.SYS
↑ Flash card Memory Technology driver
DEVICEHIGH=C:\THINKPAD\PAWATASF.SYS
↑ ATA SRAM Flash card driver
Rule 6 The Enhanced Card Services (IBMDSCSE.SYS) is
necessary only when you are using a Flash card.
When the total storage of the Flash cards used at the
same time exceeds 10MB, you must do one of the
following:
Assign the /TSIZE:n parameter in the
PAWATASF.SYS file.
For example:
1. If the maximum total storage is 20MB, specify:
DEVICE=PAWATASF.SYS /TSIZE:6
2. If the maximum total storage is 40MB, specify:
DEVICE=PAWATASF.SYS /TSIZE:1
See the /TSIZE parameter on page 261.
This increases the memory resident area for
PAWATASF.SYS.
Assign the /EMS parameter in the PAWATASF.SYS
file, and the /NE parameter in the IBMDOSCS.SYS
file. This sets IBMDOSCS.SYS not to use the EMS
page frame and allows PAWATASF.SYS to use it
instead. (The EMS memory must be enabled.)
For example:
DEVICE=IBMDOSCS.SYS /NE
DEVICE=IBMDSCSE.SYS
:
DEVICE=PAWATASF.SYS /EMS

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 257

Advanced Information for PC Cards

Storage Card Device Driver

PCM2ATA.ADD, PCM2SRAM.SYS, and PCM2FLSH.SYS are
storage card device drivers. The following section describes these
storage card device drivers available in PC Card Director.

PCMCIA Storage Card Device Driver for OS/2

Note: PCM2ATA.ADD supports ATA cards, PCM2SRAM.SYS supports
Install PCM2ATA.ADD for all storage SRAM cards, and PCM2FLSH.SYS supports Flash cards.
cards, even when you are using
SRAM or Flash cards. Any PC Card installed in the slot is recognized by its device driver,
so regardless of its type, you can access the card by the drive name
assigned to the slot. When using the PCMCIA ATA Card Mount
Utility, install the PCMCIA Storage API device driver
(PCMSSDIF.SYS) for OS/2.

PCMCIA Storage Card Device Driver for DOS and Windows

ATA cards, SRAM cards, and Flash cards are PCMCIA storage
cards. PAWATA.SYS supports ATA cards, PAWATAS.SYS supports
ATA cards and SRAM cards, and PAWATASF.SYS supports ATA
cards, SRAM cards, and Flash cards.

These device drivers assign a drive letter for each usable PCMCIA
slot. These drive letters are displayed when the device drivers are
initialized, and then you can use the drive letter to access the
installed PCMCIA storage card. When you run FORMAT.COM
against the drive letter, the SRAM card is formatted as a diskette and
the ATA or Flash card is formatted as a nonremovable disk. In the
File Manager under Windows, the drive letters are represented and
treated as a diskette drive, regardless of the storage card type.

Before Using PCMCIA Storage Cards

Format new PCMCIA storage cards before use. For Flash cards, run
the Flash Format Utility (FFORMAT.EXE/FFORMAT2.EXE); then
format the Flash card. For ATA cards and SRAM cards, there is no
need to run any programs before formatting the card. Format using

258 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

the FORMAT.COM program, by displaying the File Manager (for

Windows), or by choosing the drive icon (for OS/2).

Using PCMCIA ATA Cards with Multiple Partitions

The device driver assigns a drive letter only to the active (bootable)
partition of the ATA card if it holds multiple partitions. For other
primary partitions or logical drives in an extended partition, use the
PCMCIA ATA Card Mount utility to assign the drive letter to it.

Parameters for the OS/2 PCMCIA ATA Card Device Driver

The following are the parameters in the OS/2 PCMCIA ATA card
device driver and their explanations:
BASEDEV=PCM2ATA.ADD [/S:n] [/P:hhhh] [/EXIRQ:n]
[/NOBEEP] [/B] [/STBTIME:n] [/MDRV:n] [/!DM]
/S:n Specifies the number of PC Card slots. /S:1 shows
that there is only one PC Card slot. When this
parameter is not set, the number of PC Card slots is
set to 2.
/P:hhhh Specifies the lower limit for the I/O address of the
ATA card. The device driver assigns the next usable
I/O address from this lower limit to the card. When
this parameter is not set, the device driver looks for a
usable address and assigns it to the card.
/EXIRQ:n Specifies the IRQ level that is not assigned to the
card. You can set more than one IRQ level.
/NOBEEP Specifies not to beep when a storage card is
installed. When this parameter is not set, you will
hear a beep every time a storage card is installed
into the PCMCIA slot.
/B Specifies that OS/2 has started from an ATA card.
When this parameter is set, there will be no
redundancy in assigning the logical drive to the slot
where OS/2 was booted. It depends on the ATA
card whether you can start OS/2 from it.

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 259

Advanced Information for PC Cards

/STBTIME:n Specifies the time (from 1 to 21 minutes) until

entering standby mode. When the ATA card is not
accessed for the time specified by this parameter, the
ATA card enters standby mode (only when your ATA
card supports standby mode). When this parameter
is not specified, standby mode for the ATA card is
disabled.
/MDRV:n Specifies the number of extra drives that can be used
in addition to the number of PCMCIA slots available
for the PCMCIA storage devices. When this
parameter is not specified, no extra drive is given to
the device driver. The extra drives can be activated
by the PCMCIA ATA Card Mount utility. For more
information, see “ATA Card Mount Utility” on
page 65.
/!DM Specifies not to use OS2DASD.DMD as the device
manager. When this parameter is set,
OS2PCARD.DMD is used instead.

Parameters for DOS PCMCIA Storage Card Device Drivers

The following are the parameters in the DOS PCMCIA storage card
device driver and their explanations:

DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] PAWATA.SYS [/P:hhhh] [/NOBEEP]

[/STBTIME:n] [/MDRV:n]
DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] PAWATAS.SYS [/P:hhhh] [/NOBEEP]
[/STBTIME:n] [/MDRV:n]
DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] PAWATASF.SYS [/P:hhhh]
[/NOBEEP] [/STBTIME:n] [/MDRV:n] [/EMS] [/TSIZE:n]
/P:hhhh Specifies the lower limit for the I/O address of the
ATA card. The device driver assigns the next usable
I/O address from this lower limit to the card. When
this parameter is not set, the device driver looks for a
usable address and assigns that address to the card.
/NOBEEP Specifies not to beep when a storage card is
installed. When this parameter is not set, you will
hear a beep every time a storage card is installed
into the PCMCIA slot.

260 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

/STBTIME:n Specifies the time (from 1 to 21 minutes) until

entering standby mode. When the ATA card is not
accessed for the time specified by this parameter, the
ATA card enters standby mode (only when your ATA
card supports standby mode). When this parameter
is not specified, standby mode for the ATA card is
disabled.
/MDRV:n Specifies the number of extra drives that can be used
in addition to the number of PCMCIA slots available
for the PCMCIA storage devices. When this
parameter is not specified, no extra drive is given to
the device driver. The extra drives can be activated
by the PCMCIA ATA Card Mount Utility.
/EMS When this parameter is specified, the device driver
uses the EMS resources if they are usable. When
this parameter is not specified, the device driver does
not use the EMS resources.
/TSIZE:n You can specify the size of the table for the device
driver data in the resident memory area. When the
EMS resources are not usable, the data tables are
created in the resident memory area. When the EMS
resources are usable, this parameter is ignored. The
table size depends on the variable n and is
calculated as follows:
table size = n × 1024 bytes
Specify n in a decimal number. When this parameter
is not specified, the device driver creates the table
with n=4. Select the variable n depending on the
total capacity of the Flash card: The following is an
example of the relationship between the variable n
and the total capacity of the Flash card:
Up to 10MB: n=4
Up to 20MB: n=6
Up to 40MB: n=10

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 261

Advanced Information for PC Cards

PCMCIA Storage Card Device Manager for OS/2

OS2PCARD.DMD is the device manager for the PCMCIA storage
card. Specify the /!DM parameter in the PCM2ATA.ADD line, so
OS2PCARD.DMD is used instead of OS2DASD.DMD. If you do not
specify /!DM, PCM2ATA.ADD uses the OS/2 standard Storage Card
Device Manager (OS2DASD.DMD); however, under some conditions
the format will not be correct when you use OS2DASD.DMD.

The following is a line from the CONFIG.SYS file that describes the
Storage Card Device Manager:
BASEDEV=OS2PCARD.DMD

OS/2 PCMCIA Storage API Device Driver

This device driver provides a communication function between PC
Card Director or the mount utility, and the OS/2 PCMCIA ATA card
device driver. As a result, a utility in the upper layer can get the
drive letter or partition information of the PCMCIA storage card.

The following is a line from the CONFIG.SYS file that describes the
Storage API device driver:
DEVICE =[drive:][directory]PCMSSDIF.SYS

Flash Card Memory Technology Driver

This driver is used to read and write to a Flash card. It is used by
the DOS storage card device driver (PAWATASF.SYS) and OS2
Flash card driver (PCM2FLSH.SYS).

The following is a line from the CONFIG.SYS file that describes the
Flash Card Memory Technology driver, according to the operating
system:
For OS/2:
DEVICE =[drive:] [directory] FLSH2MTD.SYS ← Memory
Technology driver
DEVICE =[drive:] [directory] PCM2FLSH.SYS
↑ Storage card device driver

262 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

For DOS and Windows:

DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] IBMDOSCS.SYS ← Card Services
DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] IBMDSCSE.SYS
↑ Enhanced Card Services
DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] FLSHDMTD.SYS
↑ Memory Technology driver
DEVICE=[drive:] [directory] PAWATASF.SYS
↑ ATA SRAM Flash card device driver

Checking the Allocated Resources for the PC Card

If the resources for the PC Cards are not correctly allocated, you will
see error messages. You can check which resources for the PC
Card were not correctly allocated by using PC Card Director. To
check the resources that could not be allocated, click on the Status
button in the PC Card Director program.

The following are some reasons why the resources could not be
correctly allocated, and corresponding actions you should take to
solve the problem.
The resource was already reserved by another device.
Resource Map Utility or other configuration files were not set up
correctly.

To change the resource settings for the PC Card or other devices,

you can do one of the following:
Refer to the system manual or utility program and check which
device is using the resources planned to be used by the PC
Card. Then, change the settings for the device by using, for
example, the setup programs. For more information, refer to the
manuals supplied with your computer.
If your PC Card is enabled by a PC Card enabler, you can
change the resources assigned for the PC Card by changing the
parameters in the PC Card enabler, or change the settings in the
configuration file of the PC Card. For more information, refer to
the manuals supplied with your PC Card.

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 263

Advanced Information for PC Cards

If you are using Auto Configurator to enable your PC Card, you

can change the resources assigned to the PC Card by using the
Auto Configurator. Make sure the resource is not used by other
devices and can be used by the PC Card and its application
program. For more information, see “Starting the Auto
Configurator Utility for OS/2 or Windows” on page 249.
If you are using modem cards, some modem cards use serial
port COM1 or COM2 and do not have the setup information for
COM3 and COM4. These modem cards cannot be enabled
when other devices are using COM1 and COM2. (For example,
as a default, COM1 is used by the InfraRed device and COM2 is
used by the Mwave modem.) There are error messages that the
I/O port address 3F8 or 2F8, or IRQ level 3 or 4, were not
allocated.
In this case use the ThinkPad Setup Utility in the ThinkPad
Features program to:
– For OS/2: Disable the devices using COM1 or COM2; then
restart the system.
– For DOS or Windows: Reserve COM2 for the PC Card, and
use COM1 for other integrated communication devices.

264 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Advanced Information for PC Cards

Avoiding PC Card Resource Conflicts

PC Card Director checks the resources for most devices used by the
system to avoid resource conflicts, but does not recognize all option
devices used. Especially, when you are using the Dock I or Dock II,
there is a possibility that the I/O port address or IRQ level may
conflict with the PC Card.

Check the status of the PC Card by using PC Card Director. When

the PC Card is set to “Ready,” the resources used for that PC Card
are displayed. Refer to the manuals supplied with the system or
option adapters to check that the resources for the devices in the
system or for the option adapters are not conflicting with the
resources for the IRQ level, I/O port address, or memory window of
the PC Card. If you are using OS/2 Warp Version 3, you can check
the assigned system resources using RMVIEW.EXE.

If there is a conflict:
Use the Resource Map Utility, so that those resources are not
assigned to the PC Card. (Change the value for the /MA=
parameter, or add the /MX=, /PX=, or /IX= parameter.)
If you are using OS/2 Warp Version 3, use RESERVE.SYS to
register those resources in OS/2.
To set RESERVE.SYS, refer to the manuals or online help for
OS/2 Warp, or refer to the READ.ME file of PC Card Director.
If you are using Auto Configurator, change the enabling order or
resource information using the Auto Configurator Utility.
See “Starting the Auto Configurator Utility for DOS” on page 253
and “Starting the Auto Configurator Utility for OS/2 or Windows”
on page 249.
Change the parameter for the PC Card enabler. Refer to the
manuals supplied with the PC Card.
If you are using network cards, change the resource information
for the PC Card stated in the PROTOCOL.INI or NET.CFG file.
To change the configuration file of the network cards, refer to the
manuals or READ.ME files of the PC Cards or network drivers.

Appendix B. Advanced Information for PC Cards 265

Advanced Information for PC Cards

266 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

Appendix C. Additional Information for Mwave DSP Feature

Note: This appendix provides detailed information about the ThinkPad

In some countries, the Mwave Mwave DSP Features.
telephony functions are available
only after the DAA/Telephony Kit
option is installed.

Audio Information
This section provides information about the ThinkPad audio features.

Sound
The Mwave DSP features provide support for Windows Version 3.11
audio applications that comply with the Windows MultiMedia
Extensions (MME) for audio; for example, Windows Sound Recorder
and Windows Media Player that are shipped with Windows Version
3.11.

In general, recording audio music and speech at higher quality

requires more disk storage. The following table shows some typical
values for various sampling rates:

Sample Sample Frequency Signal/Noise Remarks

Rate Size Range Ratio
44.1 KHz 16 bits 20 Hz — 20 80 dB CD quality
KHz
22.05 KHz 16 bits 20 Hz — 10 80 dB < CD quality
KHz
11 KHz 16 bits 20 Hz — 5 80 dB AM quality
KHz
9.6 KHz 14 bits 200 Hz — 4 60 dB Toll quality
KHz
8.0 KHz 8 bits 200 Hz — 4 60 dB Toll quality
KHz

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 267

Information for Mwave DSP Features

Mwave MIDI Overview

Mwave MIDI Synthesizer Overview

The Mwave audio features can be a music synthesizer, creating
realistic instrument sounds from a sequence of MIDI commands.
The MIDI standard defines a very compact representation for music.
MIDI is composed of a sequence of commands representing musical
events, such as a key press on a music keyboard.

The Mwave Windows Audio Device Driver provides a sampled sound

MIDI synthesizer that exceeds the Base Multitimbral requirements of
the MPC 1 and MPC 2 specifications.

The Mwave synthesizer is enhanced with a QSound** process.

QSound is a signal processing technique used to deceive the
acoustic response system (hearing) of a listener. Audio from a
stereo speaker system that has been processed by QSound can give
the listener the perception that the speakers are displaced much
further to the listener's left and right than they actually are.

This is particularly useful for a personal computer system, in which

table space is limited, and a small set of speakers are located
immediately adjacent to the computer. The angular displacement of
the speakers to the listener's left and right is ordinarily not enough to
produce a decent stereo effect. But with QSound processing, the
listener can perceive sound coming from a variety of directions,
some of which are significantly further to the left and right than the
actual location of the speakers. The net result is a significantly
improved stereo effect.

To optimize the QSound effect, sit directly in front of the computer

with the speakers equally distant from both sides of the computer.

Understanding the MIDI Mapper

The MIDI Mapper is a program included with Microsoft Windows that
interacts with the Mwave Windows Synthesizer Device Driver to
control the way sounds are created on your Mwave feature. In
Windows MIDI applications allowing you to specify a MIDI output

268 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Information for Mwave DSP Features

device, select the Windows MIDI Mapper as the output device rather
than sending output to the Mwave driver directly.

The MIDI Mapper controls which of the 16 MIDI channels to send to

the Mwave feature for playback. The MPC audio specification
describes two types of synthesizers. The BASE Multitimbral
synthesizer transmits data on MIDI channels 13–16 and supports 8
simultaneous voices (8 notes at once, each of which can come from
a different instrument). The EXTENDED Multitimbral synthesizer
transmits data on MIDI channels 1–10 and supports 32 simultaneous
voices.

The Mwave feature supplies the following MIDI Mappers for selecting
which MIDI format to use for Mwave:
Mwave EXT GM For Mwave MIDI synthesizer channels 1–10
Mwave Base GM For Mwave MIDI synthesizer channels 13–16

The MPC standard requires authors to provide two versions of every

MIDI composition stored in the same file. Channels 1–10 hold the
version written for Extended Multitimbral synthesizers, whereas
channels 13–16 hold the version written for Base Multitimbral
synthesizers.

Most MIDI files included with Windows applications follow this

standard of containing two versions of each composition. This is
why the Mwave MIDI synthesizer comes with both Base and
Extended MIDI Mapper setups. If all channels were played at once,
both versions of a MIDI composition would play at the same time.
The Mwave Windows synthesizer usually sounds best when the
Mwave EXT GM setup is selected in the MIDI Mapper.

If you have a MIDI file that is not producing sound on your Mwave
feature, MIDI commands may be being sent on a set of channels the
MIDI Mapper is not responding to. Try using the Windows MIDI
Mapper to switch the setup between Mwave Base and Mwave
Extended Multitimbral modes. This lets you see if the MIDI
commands in the file are provided for only one of the two modes.

Appendix C. Additional Information for Mwave DSP Features 269

Information for Mwave DSP Features

Other MIDI Controls

The Mwave feature's MIDI synthesizer recognizes several types of
control information in the MIDI data stream:
Key velocity The harder the key is pressed, the louder the note
sounds.
Main volume This is usually controlled by a knob on a MIDI
keyboard. It is received on control number 7.
Pitch bend This can be used to mimic the sound of a whammy
bar on a guitar and is usually controlled by a thumb
wheel on a MIDI keyboard. Note pitch can be varied
(+−)2 semitones.
Pan The Mwave feature's MIDI synthesizer uses QSound
to implement pan. By using QSound, the position of
each channel's instrument is not limited by the
position of the speakers. It is received on control
number 10.
Vibrato Also referred to as modulation, this control produces
rapid, small changes in the pitch of a note and is
usually controlled by a thumb wheel on a MIDI
keyboard. Vibrato depth can be varied (+−)2
semitones. It is received on control number 1.
Sustain Each note of an instrument has an envelope that
describes the loudness of the note during attack,
decay, sustain, and release periods. Some MIDI
keyboards can be used with a pianolike sustain pedal
that prolongs the sustain period to mimic holding a
note. It is received on control number 64.

270 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Information for Mwave DSP Features

Telephony Information
This section provides additional information about the ThinkPad
telephony features.

United States Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991

(Facsimile Devices)
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful
for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send
any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such
message clearly contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each
transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date
and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity,
or individual sending the message and the telephone number of the
sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual.

In order to program this information into your facsimile, you should

refer to the accompanying fax software package.

Appendix C. Additional Information for Mwave DSP Features 271

Information for Mwave DSP Features

272 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Appendix D. Using PS2 Commands

Please note that PS2 commands are subject to change without

notice. If you enter a command written in this section and receive an
error, type PS2 ? and refer to the online help menu.

You can enter the following PS2 commands from the DOS command
prompt (of OS/2 and Windows, also) to set the features for your
computer. When entering a command, enter it in the following
syntax.

PS2 [Parameter1] [Parameter2] [Parameter3]

Syntax Rules
Follow the rules below when you enter a command.
Syntax Rule
| Select one of the options on either side of the vertical
bar ( | ).
Highlighted Enter the exact highlighted letters in either uppercase
or lowercase.
UPPERCASE Enter any value for the following:
XX: 0 - 20 HH: 0 - 23
MM: 0 - 59 SS: 0 - 59
The MM (minutes) and SS (seconds) are optional. The
default values are 0.
lowercase Command elements in lowercase are optional. For
example, PS2 SE OF and of PS2 SErial OFf gives the
same results.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 273

Using PS2 Commands

The following is a list of commonly used PS2 commands. It is

organized as follows:

Description of the command

Parameter1 Parameter2 Parameter3

Power Management Commands

Sets power on or off for the PCMCIA slots.

CARD ON | OFf —

Sets whether or not to enter suspend mode when the LCD is closed.

Cover Enable | Disable —

Note: Sets POwer, LCd, DISK, SPeed, and STandby to their original values.
This command is effective on the
current power mode set by the PM DEFAULT — —
command.

When to discharge: Discharges the battery pack.

Page 95.
DISCHARGE Enable | Disable —

When a secondary battery pack is installed:

DISCHARGE MAIN | 2ND Enable | Disable

Note: Sets the hard disk drive power-saving timer for the specified number of
This command is effective on the minutes (xx).
current power mode set by the PM
commands. DISK xx —

Enters standby or suspend mode when attaching an expansion unit.

DOCK Partial | Full —

274 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using PS2 Commands

Note: Sets the features for the digital signal processor (DSP).
Only on models with Mwave DSP
installed. DSP Enable | Disable —
ADDress 0030 | 4E30 | 8E30
| CE30
DMA 0|1|6|7
IRQ 5 | 7 | 10 | 11 | 15

Sets the features for the infrared port (IR).

IR Enable | Disable —
ON | OFf —
PORT Front | Rear | Both
MOde TPad | Sharp
COMADDress 3F8 | 2F8 | 3E8 | 2E8
IRADDress 1A0 | 1B0 | 1C0 | 1D0
IRQ 3 | 4 | 5 | 10 | 11 | 15
DMA03 Enable | Disable

Note: Creates the hibernation file.

Use this command before using
other hibernation commands. HFILE C – Z | DELete —

Note: Enters hibernation mode when the power switch is pressed.

Create the hibernation file using the
HFILE command before using this HSWITCH Enable | Disable
command.

Sets the timer to enter hibernation mode after the specified number of
minutes (xx).

HTimer xx [AC | DC]

Note: Sets the power management mode to enter when a low-battery condition
Create the hibernation file using the occurs.
HFILE command before using the LB AC: Specifies battery mode when the AC Adapter is connected.
H command. DC: Specifies ac mode when using battery power.

LBattery Suspend | Hibernation —

Note: Sets the LCD off when there is no computer operation after the specified
This command is effective on the number of minutes (xx).
current power mode set by the PM
command. LCd xx —

Appendix D. Using PS2 Commands 275

Using PS2 Commands

Note: Sets the resume timer.

yyyy can be set from 1995 to 2093.
ON at [yyyy/MM/DD] HH:MM:SS —
| Clear

Sets the power mode.

PMode High | Auto | Custom [AC | DC]

Note: Sets the timer to enter suspend mode after the specified number of minutes
When the AC or DC option is not (xx).
specified, this command is effective AC: Specifies battery mode when the AC Adapter is connected.
on the current power mode set by DC: Specifies ac mode when using battery power.
the PM command.
POwer xx [AC | DC]

RediSafe suspend mode: Resumes normal operation when detecting the ring indicator.
Page 102.
RI Enable | Disable —

Enters the RediSafe suspend mode.

SAfe Enable | Disable —

Sets power on or off for the serial device attached to the serial port.

SErial ON | OFf —

Note: Sets the processor speed.

When the AC or DC option is not AC: Specifies battery mode when the AC Adapter is connected.
specified, this command is effective DC: Specifies ac mode when using battery power.
on the current power mode set by
the PM commands. SPeed Fixed | Auto MAX | Medium | [AC | DC]
Slow | MIN

Sets the timer to enter hibernation mode from suspend mode after the
specified number of minutes.

S2H 30 | 60 | 90 | Disable —

276 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using PS2 Commands

Sets the timer to enter standby mode after the specified number of minutes
(xx).
AC: Specifies battery mode when the AC Adapter is connected.
DC: Specifies ac mode when using battery power.

STandby xx [AC | DC]

Note: Sets the power management mode to enter by the automatic power-saving
Create the hibernation file using the timer.
HFILE command before using the TI
H command. TImer Suspend | Hibernation —

Display Commands
Sets the screen expansion.

HVEXPansion ON | OFf —

Sets where to display information.

SCreen LCD | CRT | BOTH —

Sets the frequency for the external display.

VSYNC 640×480 60 | 72 | 75
800×600 56 | 60 | 72 | Disable
1024×768 43I | 60 | 70 | 72 | 75
| Disable

Alarm (Sound) Commands

Sets the computer to beep in certain conditions.

BEEP ON | OFf Alarm | System

| Warn

Sets the speaker LCD indicator to appear when the computer beeps.

SLed Enable | Disable —

Appendix D. Using PS2 Commands 277

Using PS2 Commands

Note: Sets the balance for the attached expansion unit.

The help for this command appears
only when an expansion unit is XBalance 0 – 10 —
attached to the computer.

Note: Sets the volume for the attached expansion unit.

The help for this command appears
only when an expansion unit is XVolume 0 – 10 —
attached to the computer.

System Setup Commands

Note: Sets the IRQ level for the option in the UltraBay to 15.
This command is effective only when
an option is installed in the UltraBay. IDE2 Enable | Disable —

Displays the DMA channel assignments.

? DMA — —

Sets the Fn key lock function.

FNSticky Enable | Disable —

Sets the HVEXPansion command to on or off with the Fn+F8 key

combination.

F8 Enable | Disable —

Sets the features for the internal modem/fax.

IMODEM Enable | Disable —

ADDress 1|2|3|4

Displays the interrupt level assignments.

? IRQ — —

278 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Using PS2 Commands

Sets the keyboard typematic speed.

KRate Normal | Fast —

Sets the features for the parallel port.

PARallel Enable | Disable —

ADDress LPT1 | LPT2 | LPT3
MOde Uni | Bi | EPP | ECP
DMA 0 | 1 | 3 | Disable

Sets the features for the serial port.

SERA Enable | Disable —

ADDress 1|2|3|4

Disables the screen off, standby, and suspend timers for presentations.

PRESENtation Enable | Disable —

Sets the features for the Sound Blaster emulation.

SB Enable | Disable —
ADDress 220 | 240
DMA 0|1|6|7
IRQ 5 | 7 | 10 | 11

Sets the startup screen when the computer power is turned on.

STARTup Enable | Disable —

Sets the TrackPoint III.

TPOint Enable | Disable —

Other Commands
Displays the help menu.

? | Help — —

Appendix D. Using PS2 Commands 279

Using PS2 Commands

Sets the A drive to the internal or external diskette drive.

FDD Internal | External —

Note: Enters hibernation mode.

Create the hibernation file using the
HFILE command before using this HIBernation — —
command.

Enters suspend mode.

OFF | SUSpend — —

Turns off the computer.

TURN OFF —

280 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Appendix E. Features and Specifications

This appendix describes features and specifications for the computer.

For more information, refer to the Technical Reference manual.

Features
Microprocessor
Intel** Pentium** Processor 90MHz or 120MHz
256KB external cache memory

Memory
Onboard (built-in): 8MB RAM
Optional: 4MB, 8MB, and 16MB DIMMs with DIMM adapter

Storage devices
2.5-inch removable hard disk drive
3.5-inch 2.88MB or 1.44MB removable diskette drive

Display
TFT color LCD, supporting up to 16 777 216 colors
12.1 inches or 10.4 inches (when measured diagonally)
Up to 800-by-600 resolution on the LCD
Up to 1024-by-768 resolution on the external display
Brightness control

Keyboard
84-key, 85-key, or 89-key
TrackPoint III
Fn key function

External interface
Serial connector (EIA-RS232D)
Parallel connector (Centronics)
External input-device connector
External-display connector
PCMCIA slots (two Type I or Type II PC Cards, or one Type III
PC Card)

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 281

Features and Specifications

Headphone jack
Microphone/line-in jack (supports a dynamic microphone or a
self-battery-powered condenser microphone)
Fax/modem port (in some countries, available as an option)
Infrared ports

System bus
240-pin, 16-bit AT bus connector

282 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Features and Specifications

Specifications
Size
Width: 297 mm (11.7 in.)
Depth: 210 mm (8.3 in.)
Height:
– Model with 10.4-inch LCD: 44.2 mm (1.74 in.)
– Model with 12.1-inch LCD: 48.7 mm (1.92 in.)

Weight
Minimum configuration with lithium ion battery pack:
Model with 10.4-inch LCD: 2.77 kg (6.10 lb.)
Model with 12.1-inch LCD: 3.07 kg (6.76 lb.)

Environment
Note: Temperature (at altitudes less than 2438 m (8000 ft)):
When you charge the lithium ion – Operating1 5° to 35°C (41° to 95°F)
battery pack, its temperature must be – Operating2 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F)
at least 10°C (50°F).
– Non-operating: 5° to 43°C (41° to 109°F)
Relative Humidity:
– Operating1 8% to 95%
– Operating2 8% to 80%
Maximum altitude: 3048 m (10 000 ft)3
– Maximum temperature at 3048 m (10 000 ft): 31.3°C
(88° F)

Heat output
Approximately 30 Kcal per hour

Electrical (AC Adapter)

Sine-wave input, at 50 to 60 Hz, is required
The input rating of the AC Adapter: 100–240 V ac, 50/60 Hz.

1 With no diskette in drive.

2 With diskette in drive.
3 In unpressurized conditions.

Appendix E. Features and Specifications 283

Features and Specifications

Lithium ion battery pack

Nominal voltage: 10.8 V dc
Capacity: 2.8 AH

IBM Power Cords

For your safety, IBM provides a power cord with a grounded
attachment plug to use with this IBM product. To avoid electrical
shock, always use the power cord and plug with a properly grounded
outlet.

IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by
Underwriters Laboratory (UL) and certified by the Canadian
Standards Association (CSA).

For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and

CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT
or SJT, three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length, and a
parallel blade, grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes,
125 volts.

For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (in the U.S.): Use a
UL-listed and CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18
AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet
in length, and a tandem blade, grounding-type attachment plug rated
15 amperes, 250 volts.

For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.):

Use a cord set with a grounding-type attachment plug rated 15
amperes (minimum), 250 volts. The cord set should be marked
<HAR> and have the appropriate safety approvals for the country in
which the equipment will be installed.

IBM power cords for a specific country are usually available only in
that country:

284 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Features and Specifications

IBM Power
Cord Used in These Countries
Part Number
25H2205 Argentina, Australia, New Guinea, New Zealand,
Papua, Paraguay, Uruguay
25H2207 Bahamas, Barbados, Bermuda, Bolivia, Canada,
Cayman Islands, Colombia, Costa Rica, Dominican
Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Guatemala, Guyana,
Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Korea (South), Mexico,
Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama, Peru,
Philippines, Saudi Arabia, Suriname, Taiwan, Trinidad
(West Indies), United States of America, Venezuela
25H2219 Thailand
25H2209 Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Czech Republic, Egypt,
Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland,
Indonesia, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal,
Romania, Slovakia, Spain, Sweden, Turkey, former
Yugoslavia
25H2211 Denmark
25H2213 Bangladesh, Pakistan, South Africa, Sri Lanka
25H2215 Abu Dhabi, Albania, Antigua, Bahrain, Brunei, Dubai,
Fiji, Hong Kong, India, Ireland, Kenya, Kuwait,
Macao, Malaysia, Nigeria, Oman, People's Republic
of China, Qatar, Singapore, United Kingdom
25H2221 Switzerland
25H2223 Chile, Italy
25H2225 Israel
85G6665 Japan (2-pin)

Appendix E. Features and Specifications 285

Features and Specifications

Diskette Standards
To get the best performance from your diskette drives, use
high-quality diskettes (such as IBM diskettes) that meet or exceed
the following standards:

1MB, 3.5-inch, unformatted diskette:

ANSI (American National Standards Institute) X3.137
ISO (International Standards Organization) 8860
ECMA (European Computer Manufacturers Association) 100

2MB, 3.5-inch, unformatted diskette:

ANSI X3.171
ISO 9529
ECMA 125
Note: 4MB, 3.5-inch, unformatted diskette:
In some country, 4MB diskettes can
be used when the diskette drive ANSI Standard (under proposal at the time of printing)
option is installed. ISO 10994 (Type 303)
ECMA 147

286 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Appendix F. Product Warranties and Notices

International Business Machines Corporation Armonk, New York 10504

Statement of Limited Warranty

The warranties provided by IBM in this Statement of Limited Warranty apply only to
Machines you originally purchase for your use, and not for resale, from IBM or an IBM
authorized reseller. The term “Machine” means an IBM machine, its features,
conversions, upgrades, elements, or accessories, or any combination of them.
Machines are subject to these terms only if purchased in the United States or Puerto
Rico, or Canada, and located in the country of purchase. If you have any questions,
contact IBM or your reseller.

Machine: IBM ThinkPad 760C except the Battery Pack

Warranty Period*: Three Years
*Elements and accessories are warranted for three months. Contact your place
of purchase for warranty service information.

Production Status
Each Machine is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts
(which perform like new parts). In some cases, the Machine may not be new and may
have been previously installed. Regardless of the Machine's production status, IBM's
warranty terms apply.

The IBM Warranty

IBM warrants that each Machine 1) is free from defects in materials and workmanship
and 2) conforms to IBM's Official Published Specifications. IBM calculates the
expiration of the warranty period from the Machine's Date of Installation. The date on
your receipt is the Date of Installation, unless IBM or your reseller informs you
otherwise.
During the warranty period, IBM or your reseller will provide warranty service under
the type of service designated for the Machine and will manage and install engineering
changes that apply to the Machine. IBM or your reseller will specify the type of
service.
For a feature, conversion, or upgrade, IBM or your reseller may require that the
Machine on which it is installed be 1) the designated, serial-numbered Machine and 2)
at an engineering-change level compatible with the feature, conversion, or upgrade.
Some of these transactions (called “Net-Priced” transactions) may include additional
parts and associated replacement parts that are provided on an exchange basis. All
removed parts become the property of IBM and must be returned to IBM.
Replacement parts assume the remaining warranty of the parts they replace.
If a Machine does not function as warranted during the warranty period, IBM or your
reseller will repair or replace it (with a Machine that is at least functionally equivalent)
without charge. If IBM or your reseller is unable to do so, you may return it to your
place of purchase and your money will be refunded.
If you transfer a Machine to another user, warranty service is available to that user for
the remainder of the warranty period. You should give your proof of purchase and this
Statement to that user.

Warranty Service
To obtain warranty service for the Machine, you should contact your reseller or call
IBM. In the United States, call IBM at 1-800-772-2227. In Canada, call IBM at
1-800-565-3344. You may be required to present proof of purchase.
Depending on the Machine, the service may be 1) a “Repair” service at your location
(called “On-site”) or at one of IBM's or a reseller's service locations (called “Carry-in”)
or 2) an “Exchange” service, either On-site or Carry-in.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 287

Product Warranties and Notices

When a type of service involves the exchange of a Machine or part, the item IBM or
your reseller replaces becomes its property and the replacement becomes yours. The
replacement may not be new, but will be in good working order and at least
functionally equivalent to the item replaced.
It is your responsibility to:
1. obtain authorization from the owner (for example, your lessor) to have IBM or your
reseller service a Machine that you do not own;
2. where applicable, before service is provided —
a) follow the problem determination, problem analysis, and service request
procedures that IBM or your reseller provide,
b) secure all programs, data, and funds contained in a Machine,
c) inform IBM or your reseller of changes in a Machine's location, and
d) for a Machine with exchange service, remove all features, parts, options,
alterations, and attachments not under warranty service. Also, the Machine
must be free of any legal obligations or restrictions that prevent its exchange;
and
3. be responsible for loss of, or damage to, a Machine in transit when you are
responsible for the transportation charges.

Extent of Warranty
IBM does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of a Machine.
Misuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, improper
maintenance by you, or failure caused by a product for which IBM is not responsible
may void the warranties.

THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. HOWEVER, SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES. IF THESE LAWS APPLY,
THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN
DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY
AFTER THAT PERIOD.
In Canada, warranties include both warranties and conditions.
Some jurisdictions do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so
the above limitation may not apply to you.

Limitation of Liability
Circumstances may arise where, because of a default on IBM's part (including
fundamental breach) or other liability (including negligence and misrepresentation),
you are entitled to recover damages from IBM. In each such instance, regardless of
the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages, IBM is liable only for:
1. bodily injury (including death), and damage to real property and tangible personal
property; and
2. the amount of any other actual loss or damage, up to the greater of $100,000 or
the charge for the Machine that is the subject of the claim.
Under no circumstances is IBM liable for any of the following:
1. third-party claims against you for losses or damages (other than those under the
first item listed above);
2. loss of, or damage to, your records or data; or
3. economic consequential damages (including lost profits or savings) or incidental
damages, even if IBM is informed of their possibility.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which
vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

288 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Product Warranties and Notices

International Business Machines Corporation Armonk, New York 10504

Statement of Limited Warranty

The warranties provided by IBM in this Statement of Limited Warranty apply only to
Machines you originally purchase for your use, and not for resale, from IBM or an IBM
authorized reseller. The term “Machine” means an IBM machine, its features,
conversions, upgrades, elements, or accessories, or any combination of them.
Machines are subject to these terms only if purchased in the United States or Puerto
Rico, or Canada, and located in the country of purchase. If you have any questions,
contact IBM or your reseller.

Machine: Battery Pack

Warranty Period*: One Year
*Elements and accessories are warranted for three months. Contact your place
of purchase for warranty service information.

Production Status
Each Machine is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts
(which perform like new parts). In some cases, the Machine may not be new and may
have been previously installed. Regardless of the Machine's production status, IBM's
warranty terms apply.

The IBM Warranty

IBM warrants that each Machine 1) is free from defects in materials and workmanship
and 2) conforms to IBM's Official Published Specifications. IBM calculates the
expiration of the warranty period from the Machine's Date of Installation. The date on
your receipt is the Date of Installation, unless IBM or your reseller informs you
otherwise.
During the warranty period, IBM or your reseller will provide warranty service under
the type of service designated for the Machine and will manage and install engineering
changes that apply to the Machine. IBM or your reseller will specify the type of
service.
For a feature, conversion, or upgrade, IBM or your reseller may require that the
Machine on which it is installed be 1) the designated, serial-numbered Machine and 2)
at an engineering-change level compatible with the feature, conversion, or upgrade.
Some of these transactions (called “Net-Priced” transactions) may include additional
parts and associated replacement parts that are provided on an exchange basis. All
removed parts become the property of IBM and must be returned to IBM.
Replacement parts assume the remaining warranty of the parts they replace.
If a Machine does not function as warranted during the warranty period, IBM or your
reseller will repair or replace it (with a Machine that is at least functionally equivalent)
without charge. If IBM or your reseller is unable to do so, you may return it to your
place of purchase and your money will be refunded.
If you transfer a Machine to another user, warranty service is available to that user for
the remainder of the warranty period. You should give your proof of purchase and this
Statement to that user.

Warranty Service
To obtain warranty service for the Machine, you should contact your reseller or call
IBM. In the United States, call IBM at 1-800-772-2227. In Canada, call IBM at
1-800-565-3344. You may be required to present proof of purchase.
Depending on the Machine, the service may be 1) a “Repair” service at your location
(called “On-site”) or at one of IBM's or a reseller's service locations (called “Carry-in”)
or 2) an “Exchange” service, either On-site or Carry-in.

Appendix F. Product Warranties and Notices 289

Product Warranties and Notices

When a type of service involves the exchange of a Machine or part, the item IBM or
your reseller replaces becomes its property and the replacement becomes yours. The
replacement may not be new, but will be in good working order and at least
functionally equivalent to the item replaced.
It is your responsibility to:
1. obtain authorization from the owner (for example, your lessor) to have IBM or your
reseller service a Machine that you do not own;
2. where applicable, before service is provided —
a) follow the problem determination, problem analysis, and service request
procedures that IBM or your reseller provide,
b) secure all programs, data, and funds contained in a Machine,
c) inform IBM or your reseller of changes in a Machine's location, and
d) for a Machine with exchange service, remove all features, parts, options,
alterations, and attachments not under warranty service. Also, the Machine
must be free of any legal obligations or restrictions that prevent its exchange;
and
3. be responsible for loss of, or damage to, a Machine in transit when you are
responsible for the transportation charges.

Extent of Warranty
IBM does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of a Machine.
Misuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, improper
maintenance by you, or failure caused by a product for which IBM is not responsible
may void the warranties.

THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. HOWEVER, SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES. IF THESE LAWS APPLY,
THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN
DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY
AFTER THAT PERIOD.
In Canada, warranties include both warranties and conditions.
Some jurisdictions do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so
the above limitation may not apply to you.

Limitation of Liability
Circumstances may arise where, because of a default on IBM's part (including
fundamental breach) or other liability (including negligence and misrepresentation),
you are entitled to recover damages from IBM. In each such instance, regardless of
the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages, IBM is liable only for:
1. bodily injury (including death), and damage to real property and tangible personal
property; and
2. the amount of any other actual loss or damage, up to the greater of $100,000 or
the charge for the Machine that is the subject of the claim.
Under no circumstances is IBM liable for any of the following:
1. third-party claims against you for losses or damages (other than those under the
first item listed above);
2. loss of, or damage to, your records or data; or
3. economic consequential damages (including lost profits or savings) or incidental
damages, even if IBM is informed of their possibility.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which
vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

290 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Product Warranties and Notices

Notices
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services
do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries
in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program,
or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product,
program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent
product, program, or service that does not infringe any of the
intellectual property rights of IBM may be used instead of the IBM
product, program, or service. The evaluation and verification of
operation in conjunction with other products, except those expressly
designated by IBM, are the responsibility of the user.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering

subject matter in this document. The furnishing of this document
does not give you any license to these patents. You can send
license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of Licensing, IBM
Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood, NY 10594, U.S.A.

Trademarks
The following terms, in this publication, are trademarks of the IBM
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries:

AT IBM
Multimedia Presentation Manager/2 MMPM/2
Mwave Operating System/2
OS/2 OS/2 Warp
PS/2 ThinkPad
TrackPoint III Win-OS/2

The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**) in this

publication, are trademarks of other companies as follows:

America Online America Online, Inc.

Bell AT&T Bell Laboratories
Centronics Centronics Data Computer Corporation
Compuserve Compuserve, Inc.
Hewlett Packard Hewlett Packard Corporation
Hayes Hayes Corporation
Indeo Intel Corporation
Intel Intel Corporation

Appendix F. Product Warranties and Notices 291

Product Warranties and Notices

IntelDX4 Intel Corporation

Kensington Kensington Microware, Inc.
MCI Microsoft Corporation
MicroSaver Kensington Microware, Inc.
MNP Microcomm, Inc.
Microsoft Microsoft Corporation
MS-DOS Microsoft Corporation
Omnibook Hewlett Packard Corporation
PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International
Association
Phoenix Phoenix Technologies, Ltd.
Prodigy PRODIGY Services
Prosonus Prosonus, Inc.
QEMM Quarterdeck Office Systems
QSound QSound, Inc.
Sharp Sharp Corporation
Sound Blaster Creative Labs, Inc.
Video for Windows Microsoft Corporation
Western Digital Western Digital Corporation
Windows Microsoft Corporation
Wizard Sharp Corporation
386MAX Qualitas, Inc.
100LX Hewlett Packard Corporation
200LX Hewlett Packard Corporation

292 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Product Warranties and Notices

Electronic Emission Notice

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
Consult an IBM authorized dealer or service representative for help.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet
FCC emission limits. Proper cables and connectors are available from IBM authorized
dealers. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by
using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or
modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Appendix F. Product Warranties and Notices 293

Product Warranties and Notices

Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement

This equipment does not exceed Class B limits per radio noise emissions for digital
apparatus, set out in the Radio Interference Regulation of the Canadian Department of
Communications.

Avis de conformité aux normes du ministère des Communications du

Canada
Cet équipement ne dépasse pas les limites de Classe B d'émission de bruits
radioélectriques pour les appareils numériques, telles que prescrites par le Règlement
sur le brouillage radioélectrique établi par le ministère des Communications du
Canada.

European Community Directive Conformance Statement

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council Directive
89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electro-magnetic compatibility.
A declaration of Conformity with the requirements of the Directive has been signed by
IBM United Kingdom Limited, PO BOX 30 Spango Valley Greenock Scotland
PA160AH.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022.

294 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Product Warranties and Notices

Telecommunication Notice
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and
Telephone Company Requirements (Part 68 of the FCC
Rules)
1. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for
any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any
message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on
the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an
identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending
the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such
business, other entity, or individual.
In order to program this information into your computer, you should be
sure to follow the installation instructions for your fax software package.
2. The built-in modem is built into the ThinkPad computer. It complies with
Part 68 of the FCC Rules. A label is affixed to the bottom of the
computer that contains, among other things, the FCC registration
number, USOC, and Ringer Equivalency Number (REN) for this
equipment. If these numbers are requested, look at the label and
provide this information to your telephone company.
3. The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect
to your telephone line and still have those devices ring when your
number is called. In most, but not all, areas, the sum of the RENs of all
devices should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of
devices you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you
should call your local telephone company to determine the maximum
REN for your calling area.
4. If the built-in modem causes harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily. If
possible, they will notify you in advance. But, if advance notice isn't
practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be advised of
your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

Appendix F. Product Warranties and Notices 295

Product Warranties and Notices

5. Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,

operations, or procedures that could affect the proper operation of your
equipment. If they do, you will be given advance notice so as to give
you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.
6. If you experience trouble with this built-in modem, contact your IBM
Authorized Seller, or the IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue,
Thornwood, NY 10594, 1-800-772-2227, for repair/warranty information.
The telephone company may ask you to disconnect this equipment from
the network until the problem has been corrected, or until you are sure
the equipment is not malfunctioning.
7. No customer repairs are possible to the modem. If you experience
trouble with this equipment, contact your Authorized Seller or the IBM
Corporation for information.
8. The modem may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone
company. Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs. Contact
your state public utility commission or corporation commission for
information.
9. When ordering network interface (NI) service from the Local Exchange
Carrier, specify service arrangement USOC RJ11C.

296 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Glossary

This glossary includes terms and BIOS (Basic Input/Output System).

definitions from the IBM Dictionary of Microcode that contains such basic
Computing (New York: McGraw-Hill, hardware operations as interactions with
1994). diskette drives, hard disk drives, and the
keyboard.
ac. Alternating current.
bitmap graphics. (1) A form of graphics
ac power. Power that is supplied to the in which all points on the display are
computer through an electrical outlet. directly addressable. (2) In multimedia
applications, a form of graphics in an
ANSI. American National Standards area of computer memory or storage that
Institute. can be displayed as an image.

application program. A program that boot. To prepare a computer system for

performs specific tasks on your operation by loading an operating
computer, such as word processing or system.
creating spreadsheets.
bps. Bits per second. In serial
Advanced Power Management (APM). transmission, the instantaneous bit speed
A facility consisting of one or more layers with which a device or channel transmits
of software that support power a character.
management in computers with power
manageable hardware. The APM bus. A facility for transferring data
software interface allows applications, between several devices located between
operating systems, device drivers, and two end points, only one device being
the APM BIOS to work together to able to transmit at a given moment.
reduce power consumption, without
reducing system performance. cache memory. A special memory,
smaller and faster than main memory,
ASCII. American National Standard that is used to hold a copy of instructions
Code for Information Interchange. and data in main memory that are likely
to be needed next by the processor, and
ATA PC Card. A PC Card with an AT that have been obtained automatically
attachment hard disk drive interface such from main memory.
as a storage device PC Card.
CD-I. Compact disc-interactive.
AUTOEXEC.BAT. A file that contains a
startup procedure of DOS. Each time combination keys. Keys that have
you start your system, DOS performs the specific functions when you hold them
commands that are stored in this file. down at the same time.

backup copy. A copy, usually of a file configuration. (1) The manner in which
or group of files, that is kept in case the the hardware and software of an
original file or files are unintentionally information processing system are
changed or destroyed. organized and interconnected. (2) The
physical and logical arrangement of
batch. A process method in which a devices and programs that make up a
program or programs records with little or data processing system. (3) The devices
no operator action. and programs that make up a system,
subsystem, or network.

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 297

Glossary

CONFIG.SYS. A file that contains a fax. (1) Facsimile machine. (2) A

group of commands to load installable transmitted document from a facsimile
device drivers and reserve space in machine.
system memory for information
processing. This file is referred to by fixed disk. In personal computing, fixed
DOS during system startup. disk is synonymous with hard disk.

CRT. Cathode ray tube display. flash memory. Electrically rewritable

storage.
device driver. A file that contains the
code needed to attach and use a device. folder. A file used to store and organize
Operating system loads device drivers for documents.
screens, keyboards, printers, diskette
drives, hard disk drives, and auxiliary fuel gauge. An indicator on the screen
devices. The user can replace these or that constantly shows the current power
add other devices by coding and loading status of the battery pack.
a device driver.
HHR. Half-horizontal resolution.
DIMM. Dual inline memory module.
hibernation. One of the power-saving
directory. A type of file containing the methods that stores data and
names and controlling information for applications running in the computer's
other files or other directories. memory on the hard disk. During
hibernation, the computer is automatically
DMA. Direct memory access. The turned off to save power. When power is
transfer of data between memory and turned on again, the computer
input/output units without processor immediately restores the same data and
intervention. applications as when hibernation started,
without restarting the operating system.
double-click. To press and release a
mouse button twice within a time frame high-resolution mode. Video
defined by the user, without moving the resolutions that are greater than 640 by
pointer off the choice. 480 pels.

DSP. Digital signal processor. icon. A graphic symbol, displayed on a

screen, that a user can point to with a
EGA. Enhanced graphics adapter. pointing device such as a TrackPoint III
or mouse to select a particular function or
EIA. Electronics Industries Association. software application.

EIA-232D. An EIA interface standard IR. Infrared.

that defines the physical, electronic, and
functional characteristics of an interface ISA. Industry standard architecture.
line that connects a communication
device and associated workstation. It ISO. International Organization for
uses a 25-pin connector and an Standardization.
unbalanced line voltage.
JEIDA. Japan Electronics Industry
EMS. Expanded memory specification. Development Association.

kilobyte (KB). 1024 bytes.

298 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Glossary

LAN. Local area network. picture element. In computer graphics,

the smallest element of a display surface
MCI. Media Control Interface that can be independently assigned color
and intensity.
megabyte (MB). 1024 kilobytes. About
1 million bytes. pixel. Picture element.

memory. Often referred to as pointing device. An instrument, such

random-access memory (RAM), as a mouse, TrackPoint III, or joystick,
measured in kilobytes (KB) or megabytes that is used to move a pointer on the
(MB) of information. screen.

MHz. Megahertz. POST. Power-on self-test.

microcode. One or more pop-up menu. On the display screen, a

microinstructions used in a product as an menu that emerges in an upward
alternative to hard-wired circuitry to direction from a particular point or line on
implement functions of a processor or a display screen.
other system component.
prompt. A visual or audible message
MIDI. Musical Instrument Digital sent by a program to request the user's
Interface. response.

modem. A device that connects your pull-down menu. On the display

computer to a telephone line, allowing it screen, a menu that emerges in a
to communicate with another computer at downward direction from a point or line at
another location. or near the top of the screen.

MPEG. Moving Pictures Experts Group reboot. Restart all operations of the
computer as if the power were just turned
parallel port. A port used to attach on.
such devices as dot-matrix printers and
input/output units; it transmits data 1 byte resume. To begin computer operations
at a time. again from suspend mode.

partial suspend mode. A kind of ROM. Read-only memory.

suspend mode where only a part of the
system components uses power. serial port. A port used to attach such
devices as display devices, letter-quality
password. A series of letters or printers, modems, plotters, and such
numbers that you designate to restrict pointing devices as light pens and mice;
access to your computer. it transmits data 1 bit at a time.

PC Card. A card that is based on the suspend. Stops all operations of the
PCMCIA standard. computer to reduce power drain and
restrict access to the files.
PCMCIA. Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association. SVGA. Super video graphics adapter.

pel. Picture element. TFT. Thin film transistor.

Glossary 299
Index

TSRs. Terminate-and-stay-resident by adjusting the number of character dots

programs, memory-resident programs vertically.
that are loaded into memory and stay
there so you can conveniently access VESA. Video Electronics Standards
them whenever you need to. Association.

vertical expansion. A video display VGA. Video graphics adapter, a video

technique in character-display mode to fit mode that produces up to 640-by-480
video images on the whole LCD screen resolution.

XMS. Extended memory specification.

300 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Index

battery pack (continued)

A preserving battery-pack life 96
AC Adapter 23 problems 224
cable, wrapping 24 replacing the battery pack 86
voltage 23 boot, selectable 49
advanced power management, brightness control
Windows 198 location 17
APM 97 broken keylock 222
AT bus 282 bus, system 281
ATA Card Mount Utility 65
attaching
Dock I or II 175
expansion unit 175
C
caps lock indicator 22
external display 170 car battery adapter 25
external keyboard 169 carrying the computer 34
external numeric keypad 167 CD-ROM drive 19
mouse 167 CD-ROM emergency eject 19
audio changing password
Mwave, using 71 hard disk password 118
audio features power-on password 113
additional information 267 supervisor password 122
problems 230 charging, battery pack 84
Auto Configurator Utility 249 devices
quick charger 85
click buttons (TrackPoint III)
B using 26
battery pack 24 Config menu
charging 84 Easy-Setup 45
discharging connector door 19
cancelling, for OS/2 and considerations
Windows 95 hibernation 107
for OS/2 and Windows 95 PC Card 103
fuel-gauge program, using 92 suspend mode 103
installing, secondary battery control power 57
pack 152
lamp 20
LCD indicator 21
location 19
D
date and time
low-battery condition 90 Easy-Setup 46
maximizing battery-powered prompt 37
operation 96 device driver
monitoring battery power infrared device driver
battery status indicator, using 88 for OS/2, installing 188
fuel-gauge program, using 92 for Windows, installing 207
operating time 24 Mwave DSP support software
for DOS, installing 195

Copyright IBM Corp. 1995 301

Index

device driver (continued) DSP (continued)

Mwave DSP support software See Mwave DSP function
(continued)
for OS/2, installing 186
for Windows, installing 205 E
PCMCIA device driver Easy-Setup
for DOS, installing 193, 203 Config menu 45
for OS/2, installing 185 date and time menu 46
video features diskette main menu 44
for OS/2, installing 190 password menu 46
for Windows, installing 208 restart menu 48
DIMM 142 start up menu 47
DIMM adapter 142 test menu 47
diskette drive 19 using 44
bezel error codes 217
removing 159 Ethernet RPL speed 50
in use, indicator 21 expansion unit
installing other options 159 attaching 175
problems 225 speaker volume control, using Fn
diskette standards 286 key 52
display 30 external devices
LCD consideration, in suspend mode 103
PS2 command 275 Dock I or II 175
switching to 52 external display 170
problems 30 external keyboard 169
SVGA external numeric keypad 167
installing, for Windows 198 external unit 175
switching, using Fn key 52 modem/fax port 163
using 30 mouse 167
Dock I or II external display
attaching 175 attaching 170
speaker volume control, using Fn color depth, changing 173
key 52 display driver
DOS Version 7.0 or later for OS/2, installing 190
hibernation file, creating 106 for Windows, installing 208
installing 191 display driver, setting 172
Mwave DSP support problems 30
software 195 screen resolution, changing 173
PC Card Director 193 using 30
PCMCIA device driver 193 external keyboard
ThinkPad features 192 attaching 169
starting PC Card Director 67 external numeric keypad
ThinkPad features, starting 42 attaching 167
drive-startup sequence 49 external-diskette-drive connector 19
DSP external-display connector 19

302 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Index

external-input-device connector 17 Helpware (continued)

ezplay command, for DOS 67 for U.S.A. 238
hibernation
considerations 107
F creating hibernation file 105
features 281 for DOS 106
Fn key for OS/2 and Windows 105
function 51 file, creating 105
location 17 PS2 command 280
Fn Key Lock Fn key 51 using 105
fuel-gauge program using Fn key function 52
Fn key function, using 51 humidity, machine specifications 283
monitoring battery status 92
using 92
I
identification numbers, recording 237
H indicator panel 20
hard disk drive 19 information notices
hibernation mode, in 105 caution notices vii
in use, indicator 21 danger notices vii
installing, secondary hard disk 156 notes vii
replacing 149 warning notices vii
securing, with password 115 infrared features
several hard disk drives, device driver
using 125 for OS/2, installing 188
hard disk password for Windows, installing 207
changing 118 using 68
prompt 37 infrared port
removing 119 location 17, 19
setting 116 problems 227
using 115 initialize
with power-on password 115 Easy-Setup 45
with supervisor password 120 input voltage 283
wrong hard disk password, installing
entering 117 DIMM 142
hardware conflicts 243 hard disk drive 149
hardware features 16—19 modem/fax port 163
hardware specifications 283 PC Card 139
headphone jack 19 secondary battery pack 152
heat output, machine specifications 283 secondary hard disk 156
HelpClub software 178
for Europe 240 internal devices
for U.S.A. 238 in UltraBay 159
Helpware
for Europe 240

Index 303
Index

memory (continued)
K Easy-Setup 45
Kensington lock increasing capacity 142
keyhole 17 specifications 281
using 131 memory area 63
keyboard memory module (DIMM) 142
location 17 memory slot
release latch 17 cover 19
specifications 281 location 19
keyboard/mouse connector 169 messages on screen 221
microphone (built-in) 17
microphone/line-in jack 19
L microprocessor
lamp 20 specifications 281
launcher, program 60 MIDI
LCD overview 268
location 17 MIDI, playing sequencer files 77
problems 30, 219 MIDI/Joystick port
lithium ion battery pack 24 location 19
locations modem
external input-device connector 6 PC Card
external-display connector 6 installing 139
headphone jack 6 removing 141
infrared ports 6 problems 230
locking device keyhole 6 modem/fax port 19
memory slot 6 installing 163
microphone/line-in jack 6 location 19
modem/fax port 6 release latch 19
parallel connector 6 mouse
PCMCIA slot 6 attaching 167
serial connector 6 using with
system expansion connector 6 Space Saver Keyboard 168
lock TrackPoint III 167
Kensington lock 131 Mwave DSP function
PC Card lock 133 additional information 267
low-battery condition 90 MIDI mapper 268
MIDI synthesizer 268
problems 230
M support software
maximizing battery power for DOS, installing 195
decreasing LCD brightness 99 for OS/2, installing 186
using Advanced Power for Windows, installing 205
Management 97 using 71
using power management 99 Mwave DSP support software
memory installing, for DOS 195

304 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Index

Mwave DSP support software (continued) options (continued)

installing, for OS/2 186 mouse
installing, for Windows 205 attaching 167
PC Card (PCMCIA Card)
inserting 139
N problems 233
notices and warranties, product 287 removing 141
numeric keypad 29 using 53
numeric lock indicator 21 pointing device
problems 229
printer
O problems 234
online book 32 problems 232
operating systems secondary battery pack,
installing installing 152
DOS Version 7.0 or later 191 secondary hard disk drive,
OS/2 Warp Version 3 or installing 156
later 180, 181 OS/2 Warp Version 3 or later 181
Windows Version 3.11 or Auto Configurator Utility 249
later 197, 198 hibernation file, creating 105
option cover installing
location 19 display driver 190
removing 159 infrared device driver 188
options Mwave DSP support
DIMM software 186
installing 142 PC Card Director 185
removing 142 PCMCIA device driver 185
diskette drive ThinkPad features 184
problems 225 PCMCIA storage card device
Dock I or II driver 258
attaching 175 ThinkPad features, starting 39
expansion unit
attaching 175
external display P
attaching 170 palm rest 17
problems 226 parallel connector 19
external keyboard, attaching 169 part numbers, power cords 284
external numeric keypad password 46
attaching 167 Easy-Setup 46
problems 229 hard disk password
hard disk drive, replacing 149 changing 118
in UltraBay 159 power-on password, using
keyboard with 115
problems 229 removing 119
modem/fax port setting 116
installing 163 using 115

Index 305
Index

password (continued) PC Card (continued)

hard disk password (continued) slot 17
wrong, entering 117 software considerations
personalization feature, using under suspend 53
with 127 suspend mode, using with 103
power-on password system boot up 246
changing 113 using 53
hard disk password, using PC Card Director
with 115 installing, for DOS 193
removing 114 installing, for OS/2 185
setting 110 installing, for Windows 203
using 110 using 54
wrong, entering 112 PCMCIA card
supervisor password See PC Card
changing 122 PCMCIA device driver
hard disk password, using for DOS, installing 193
with 120 for OS/2, installing 185
removing 124 for Windows, installing 203
setting 121 PCMCIA slot
several hard disk drives, location 17
using 125 personalization feature 127
using 120 pointing device 167
wrong, entering 122 power
PC Card 193 for the PC Card 59
ATA Card Mount Utility 65 power cords 284
Auto Configurator Utility 249 power jack
changing registered order 251 location 19
changing resource information 252 power management
eject button 17 using 99
for advanced use 249 power mode
installing 139 switching, using Fn key 52
not registering a card 250 power shutdown switch 19
power, setting 59 power switch 19
registered list 62 power-on lamp 20
registering a card 250 power-on password
registration and standard rules changing 113
for DOS and Windows 256 hard disk password, using with 115
registration and standard rules, prompt 37
CONFIG.SYS removing 114
for OS/2 254 setting 110
remote program load 246 using 110
removing 141 wrong power-on password,
resource conflicts, avoiding 265 entering 112
resources, checking 263 power, setting 59
securing 133 preserving battery pack life 96

306 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Index

printer PS2 commands (continued)

consideration, in suspend mode 103 discharge 274
problems DMA information 278
battery pack 224 DOCK 274
common 211 expansion, horizontal/vertical 277
diskette drive 225 frequency, external display 277
error codes 217 hard disk drive, power saving 274
external display 31, 226 HFILE 275
external numeric keypad 229 hibernate from suspend 276
general 222 hibernation, entering 280
hibernation, entering 227 HTIMER 275
infrared communication 227 HVEXP by Fn+F8 278
keyboard 229 internal modem, power for 278
LCD 31, 219 interrupt level information 278
messages on screen 221 keyboard typematic speed 279
modem 230 LCD power-off 275
Mwave DSP function 230 low battery
options 232 hibernation, entering 275
PC Card 233 suspend, entering 275
pointing device 229 PCMCIA slot, power 274
printer 234 power mode 276
software 235 power switch, hibernate 275
test cannot find problem 224 power to serial port 279
testing the computer 215 presentation 279
TrackPoint III 229 processor speed rate 276
troubleshooting charts 217 resume date and time 276
battery pack 224 resuming by the ring indicator 276
diskette drive 225 serial port 276
external display 226 speaker balance, expansion unit 278
external numeric keypad 229 speaker indicator on/off 277
keyboard 229 speaker volume, expansion unit 278
LCD problems 219 standby mode, timer 277
messages on screen 221 startup screen 279
options 232 suspend mode, entering 274, 280
pointing device 229 TrackPoint III 279
printer 234
software 227, 235
PS2 commands 273 R
address of DSP 278 rear door 19
automatic power saving timer record of identification numbers 237
hibernation 277 release latch
automatic power-saving timer 276 locations 17
suspend 277 removable
beep on/off 277 CD-ROM drive 19
default 274 diskette drive 19

Index 307
Index

removable (continued) serial device

hard disk drive 19 consideration, in suspend mode 103
removing serial number 19, 237
battery pack 86 service
bezel 159 HelpClub 238, 240
DIMM 142 how to get 236
hard disk drive 149 installed options 237
hard disk password 119 set memory area 57
modem/fax port 163 set status notice 57
option cover 159 setting password
PC Card 141 hard disk password 116
PC Card lock 135 power-on password 110
power-on password 114 supervisor password 121
supervisor password 124 shipped items 4
repair services size, machine specifications 283
getting service 236 software
HelpClub 238, 240 needed 178
identification numbers 237 problems 235
restart menu speaker (built-in)
Easy-Setup 48 location 17
RPL (remote program load) 49 speaker indicator 21
specifications
battery pack 284
S heat output 283
safety notices humidity, environment 283
screen expansion 31 input voltage 283
screen messages size 283
date and time prompt 37 temperature, environment 283
F1 and diskette prompts 37 weight 283
hard disk password prompt 37 standards, diskette 286
power-on password prompt 37 standby mode
power-on self test (POST) error 37 Fn key function, using 51
scroll lock indicator 22 using 101
security start up menu
Kensington lock 131 Easy-Setup 47
password, security with start up, changing 49
hard disk password 115 starting the computer 37
power-on password 110 storage card device driver 258
supervisor password 120 storage, machine specifications 281
PC Card 133 supervisor password
personalization feature 127 changing 122
security lock hard disk password, using with 120
See Kensington lock removing 124
serial connector setting 121
location 19 several hard disk drives, using 125

308 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide

 Index

supervisor password (continued) ThinkPad features (continued)

using 120 personalization utilities menu 38
wrong, entering 122 PS2 commands 273
suspend mode starting 39
considerations 103 for DOS 42
Fn key function, using 51 for OS/2 and Windows 39
PS2 command 280 ThinkPad view 40
using 101 token-ring RPL speed 50
suspend-mode lamp 20 TrackPoint III
SVGA cleaning 28
setting 170 location 17
system bus, machine specifications 281 using 26
system-expansion connector troubleshooting charts 217
location 19
system-status indicators 20
battery lamp 20 U
battery status 21 UltraBay
caps lock 22 battery pack, installing 152
diskette drive in use 21 hard disk, installing 156
hard disk in use 21 location 17
numeric lock 21 options, installing 159
power on 20 UMB, setting 63
scroll lock 22
speaker 21
suspend mode lamp 20 V
systemboard video features diskette
Easy-Setup 45 installing
for OS/2 190
Windows 208
T video in/out ports
telephony location 19
using 71 view card list 57
temperature, machine view card services resources 57
specifications 283 volume control
test menu location 17
Easy-Setup 47
testing the computer 215
ThinkPad audio features W
audio and its use 74 warranties and notices, product 287
ThinkPad features weight, machine specifications 283
installing 184, 192 Windows
DOS Version 7.0 or later 192 Auto Configurator Utility 249
OS/2 Warp Version 3 or Windows Version 3.11 or later
later 184 hibernation file, creating 105
Windows Version 3.11 or installing 198
later 202 display driver 208

Index 309
Index

Windows Version 3.11 or later

(continued)
installing (continued)
infrared device driver 207
Mwave DSP support
software 205
PC Card Director 203
PCMCIA device driver 203
ThinkPad features 202
ThinkPad features, starting 39

310 IBM ThinkPad 760C User's Guide